Home

2014 Jeep Grand Cherokee SRT Owner`s Manual

1. Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu 202 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist Display Warnings And Maintenance 203 DNS Cm 224 Precautions While Driving With ACC 207 M E em General Information 211 Rat Koco e syste Usage Prerautiong a sirs Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode 211 z E IE a ie QE FORWARD COLLISION WARNING CW Pang segs eese ns E PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF ParkSense Warning Display 229 EQUIPPED amp 21 92 braki or ra dead 218 ParkSense Display i sea ee nns 229 ParkSense amp Sensors 6s es e e 218 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense 234 ParkSense Warning Display 219 Service The ParkSense Park Assist System 234 ParkSense Display lees 219 Cleaning The ParkSense System 235 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense9 224 ParkSense System Usage Precautions 235 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II ll PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF Canadian Gate Operator Programming 248 EQUIPPED 2 riesen q dut S eer etus x ps 238 Using HomeLinkO 0 0 ee cece eee 250 eL dia on K e o ind PME 240 DOCU id Joc de Rt dus a 250 Turning ParkView On
2. Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F03 60 Amp Rad Fan F10 40 Amp Body Controller Yellow Green Exterior Lighting 2 F05 40 Amp Compressor for Air F11 30 Amp Trailer Tow Electric Green Suspension if Pink Brake If Equipped equipped F12 40 Amp Body Controller 3 F06 40 Amp Antilock Brakes Green Interior Lights Green Electronic Stability FI3 40 Amp Blower Motor Front Control Pump Green F07 40 Amp Starter Solenoid FI4 40 Amp Body Controller 4 Green Green Power Locks F08 40 Amp Emission sensors F17 30 Amp Headrest Release Green Diesel engine only Pink If Equipped F09 40 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater F20 30 Amp Passenger Door Green Diesel engine only Pink Module 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Equipped Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F22 20 Amp Engine Control F29 20 Amp Trailer Tow Parking Yellow Module Yellow Lights If F23 30 Amp Body Controller 1 Equipped Pink F30 30 Amp Trailer Tow Recep F24 30Amp Driver Door Pink tacle If Equipped Pink Module F32 30 Amp Drive Train Control F25 30 Amp Front Wipers Pink Module Pink F34 30 Amp Slip Differential F26 30 Amp Antilock Brakes Pink Control Pink Stability Control F35 30 Amp Sunroof If Module Valves Pink Equipped F28 20 Amp Trailer Tow Bac
3. 06 440 Warning Roll Over erv eR s 5 Warnings and Cautions o o o oooooooooo 8 Warranty Information 0 005 542 Washers Windshield 174 Washing Vehicle oooooooooooomoo o 498 Water Driving Through 000 369 Wheel and Wheel Trim o o o o o o o ooo ooo 499 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 0 499 Wind Buffeting i Lise edd Ron ted 44 Window Fogging sceso ieste patadas t eee 342 WindOWS s cue snak amand k ahea Rd 40 POWOP sor Sn ae e aie Baek aes REEE RR aS 40 Windshield Defroster llle 109 Windshield Washers 00000 eee 174 EIU ocu e MaMa age Wee acne ie ed d 482 Windshield Wiper Blades 040 480 Windshield Wipers 1 2 2 2 00 000 e eee ooo 174 Wiper Blade Replacement lisse 480 Wipers Intermittent cas anadas aa ina aaah ha 176 Wipers Rain SensitiVe ooooooooooooo ooo 178 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body
4. On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued Before using ParkSense it is strongly recom mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in in
5. Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings l The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR NW e P R 270 N y 270 D2 ooooo VEHICLE INFO Tire Presure 0745001491 Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure The system will automatically update the graphic dis play of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish STARTING AND OPERATING 413 o
6. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F95 10 Amp Rear Camera F100 10Amp Active Damping Red Park Assist Red If Equipped F96 10 Amp Rear Seat Heater F101 15 Amp Electrochromatic Red Switch Flashlamp Blue Mirror Smart High Charger If Beams If Equipped Equipped F97 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats F103 10 Amp Cabin Heater Natural amp Heated Steering Red Diesel engine only Wheel If F104 20 Amp Power Outlets Equipped Yellow Instrument Panel F98 25 Amp Front Heated Seats Center Console Natural If Equipped F99 10 Amp Climate Control Red Driver Assistance Systems Module 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi tioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want
7. A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter N Go To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal press the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal press the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depre
8. e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 355 CAUTION Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the shifting out of PARK parking brake shift the transmission into PARK WARNING e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal turn the engine OFE and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued Continued 356 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING
9. 259 Dpp o Mana ModE pegas 256 MI POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED 264 P O E E a pap mae a0 ap cUPHOUDERS a lt 45 0004scacaanecancaas 265 e Cu MED MM M ELE D WM STORAGE vce ese ever i m as 266 ODSQIMUCEONERSORNG E moe Glove Compartment 0 266 Cpscang Power Shade Mannal Made q Rs DOOEStordge ssa dla a ns eg a 267 OE ROWEE SIE S Expres tines emer sc d Console Features o o ooo oooooo ooo 268 Closing Power Shade Manual Mode 258 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN ll CARGO AREA FEATURES o oo o 270 W REAR WINDOW FEATURES 276 Rechargeable Flashlight 270 Rear Window Wiper Washer 276 Cargo Storage Bins oo oooocococom o 271 Rear Window Defroster 277 Retractable Cargo Area Cover ll ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED 278 It Equipped sess ee Ree ERR 273 Rear Cargo Tie Downs 274 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through th
10. Rear Detection Zones a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft or 3 8 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 23 ft 7 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi mately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de tection zones The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located
11. o ooo oo 522 Seat Belt Maintenance ills ess 502 Seat Belt Reminder 0000000000000 64 Seat Belts ec dd Eee d Rae ebd ers 52 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 57 And Pregnant Women seces rase eae Ea a a aa 65 Child Restraint ooooooooomo o 82 Extender ceu veg ea ba ene Ree ted dad 66 Front S at comico oa a 52 INSPeClON uus iia e nue EA 109 Pretensioners 4 dd 60 Reminder esses e hber vs 285 Shoulder Belt Anchorage 57 Untwisting Procedure o o ooooooooooo oo 57 DABIS due teu de E dern eeu qoa d reete ts 138 Adjustment iia er elk Rae Geh hen ata 142 Easy Entty tase S400 stage hem e RE c s 160 MOMOLY AAA kane doank aE aE a RE R E R 156 POWER rerit irere IETEN RR Repub s Ss 140 Rear Folding iae radiata ade e 153 Redlining a erased HERE esasi 143 Security Against Theft at ice 20 Security Alarm Theft Alarm o o 20 Selection of Oil ssc cs ss see e a mn 473 Sentry Key Immobilizer o ooo o oooo o 17 Sentry Key Programming 00 19 Sentry Key Replacement 004 18 Service Assistance sse 539 Service Contract s sss ed a 541 Service Manuals o o o o o oooo ooo ooo 544 SOLE lt 2 a gd ht ted RE 354 Automatic Transmission ss 354 shoulder Belts wis s exe dee me Be 52 Side Airbag cese 25 Ru es rep e Y xA 75 Signals Tutti p aio ger WR THES RR 111 Sm
12. touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro grammed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If d
13. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must start the engine and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be The following indicators should be used to ensure that warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or tion near the vehicle or in a location accessible to E children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle When shifting into PARK press the lock button on the equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC shift lever and push the lever all the way forward until or ON RUN position A child could operate power it stops When released the lever will return to its windows other controls or move the vehicle home position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 e With brake pedal released look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the
14. If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this Towing Requirements Tires could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Tips NOTE To provide optimum towing performance and to protect transmission components always select Trailer Tow mode when towing a trailer Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing The transmission controls include an adaptive d
15. In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly re strained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode a Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM Energy Management Feat
16. Inflate Tire To XX is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other tire pressure value If the Tire Pressure system requires service Service Tire Pressure System is displayed Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System IPMS under Starting and Operating for further information Trip A Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in the EVIC Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B The Trip A information will display the following tripA e Distance Average Fuel Economy 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e e Average Speed Elapsed Time Hold the OK button to reset all the information Trip B gt e e e e bart Press and release the Left or Right arrow but tripB ton until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the EVIC Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B The Trip B information will display the following an Distance Average Fuel Economy Average Speed Elapsed Time Hold the OK button to reset all the information Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted e Average Fuel Economy Miles Per G
17. Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror
18. Jeep 2014 Grand Cherokee _ OWNER S MANUAL SRT8 VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drink ing don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu J Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler Group LLC Copyrigh
19. ON RUN position this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 3 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN 4 High Beam Indicator D Indicates that headlights are on high beam 5 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped FO This indicator will illuminate when the front
20. Trip A Trip B Trailer Trip distance only Trailer Brake Gain 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INN Lower Left e e e e e e None default setting Compass Outside Temp Trans Temp Oil Temp Time Range AVG MPG Current MPG Trailer Brake Gain Lower Right e None default setting Compass Outside Temp Trans Temp Oil Temp Time Range AVG MPG Current MPG Trailer Brake Gain Restore To Defaults Restores All Settings To Default Settings Cancel Okay ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Uconnect amp ACCESS SETTINGS The Uconnect Access system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features Hard Keys Hard Keys are located below the Uconnect Access system in the center of the instrument panel In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru ment panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Your Uconnect Access system may also have a Screen Off and Back hard keys located below the system Press the Screen Off hard key to turn off the Uconnect Access screen Press the Screen Off hard key a second time to turn the
21. e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 433 WARNING Continued e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GIW 3 GAWR 4 Trailer tongue we
22. Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel 035133143 c Rear Cupholders 035209521 Glove Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 To open the glove compartment pull outward on the Door Storage datel anc lOWer ile ds Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy access 035209522 Opened Glove Compartment 035209525 Door Panel Storage 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Console Features The center console contains both an upper and a lower storage area 035209532 Is Storage Compartment Latches Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower storage compartment Storage Compartment To open the upper storage compartment pull upward on the small latch located on the lid UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 Lower Storage Compartment Lower Storage Compartment CD DVD Player If Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player Equipped located in the center console 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music o M players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury CARGO A
23. Malfunction Indicator Light 468 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 107 Ch cks Safety a de irpo esos ger ene eia 107 Child Restraint secre piraadid patapaan ameet 82 Child Safety LockS ooo ooooooomoo 34 Clean Air Gasoline i em vue PES 416 Cleaning Wheels 58 eee 444 td Ob SERIE TE 499 Climate Control 00 00 02 eee eee 332 Cold Weather Operation o ooooooooooooo ooo 352 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 331 Compact Spare Tire 2 incised enbra ieni 402 Console Overhead ooo eee 241 Contract Service 2 4 x6 ok a Rr ooo He ed 541 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 488 Cooling System cuicos ken o eee ea d 485 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 487 Coolant Capacity segs dob pk Rs 517 Coolant Levels ato eine coe PIE ed esed 485 Disposal of Used Coolant 489 Drain Flush and Refill 486 Inspection s 23g thee RE bed ad 489 Points to Remember 000 490 Pressure Cap s te sanatni Deere ru We een 488 Radiator Cap usi esegue eroe merus 488 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 486 Corrosion Protection o oo oooooo ooo 497 Cruise Control Speed Control 188 Cupholders iss sees e s 265 Customer Assistance cles 539 Data Recorder Event 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee 81 Daytime Running Lights sss stes csse a cimaas 166 Dealer Service 0 o
24. ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE PI9570R14 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIRE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should neve
25. PARK position REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 362 STARTING AND OPERATING HN DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while t
26. Settings button 3 Press the Safety amp Assistance soft key 4 Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable disable NOTE A check mark will appear in the selection box to indicate the system is turned ON Turning ParkView On Or Off With Uconneci 8 4 8 4A 1 Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect display 2 Press the Settings soft key 3 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 4 Press the Parkview Backup camera soft key to turn the ParkView system ON or OFF NOTE A check mark will appear in the selection box to indicate the system is turned ON UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 OVERHEAD CONSOLE Front Map Reading Lights The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of Opener HomeLinkG power liftgate and power sunroof the console These buttons are backlit for night time switches may also be included if equipped visibility 033333450 031433150 Overhead Console Front Map Reading Lights 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed Courtesy Lights The cour
27. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle The six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia bumper monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 47 in 120 cm from the front fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 ParkSense amp Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC or from the Uconnect Sys tem if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features or Uconnect Settings if equipped in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense amp Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and or front fascia bumper and the de tected obstacle Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel
28. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion 60 40 Seat LATCH Anchorages Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are i found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint 7 Ji You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap i between the seatback and seat cushion A Locating The LATCH Anchorages 4 In addition there are tether strap anchorages El behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will T expose the top tether strap anchorages Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II ZALELILLL I I i Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child
29. been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Engine Oil Viscosity SAE 0W 40 Full Synthetic engine oil is preferred for use in all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where us
30. feature can be enabled through the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Before programming your RKE transmitters you must select the Memory To FOB feature through the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Program mable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 NOTE If a memory profile has not already been set refer to Programming The Memory Feature for instruc tions on how to set a memory profile a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release Driver One Memory Position Recall the SET S button on the memory switch then press and release button 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK button on
31. increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column and a Knee Bolster below the glove compartment 0226001462 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Ad vanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 NOTE The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat
32. maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats indepen dently The heated seat switches for each heater are located on the rear of the center console 030909669 Rear Heated Seat Switches UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from 148 UNDERSTANDIN
33. spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive MA cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains car tridge fuses micro fuses relays and circuit breakers A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity num ber of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that 5072874390 ar Power Distribution Center a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
34. uude rx CARE 171 M TIDUHSDESGOING STEERING COLUMN assit Ambient Light 2 eq aot ek d EUER RE 172 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II ll POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED 181 ll HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED 182 Heated Steering Wheel With Uconnect 5 0 If EQUIP crics aca punta SA nace Sad be ane See 182 Heated Steering Wheel With Uconnect 8 4 8 4A 0 0 0 0 00000000 184 ll ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 1i 05 da des ar 185 To A CHVAte sene nce E ca es ee ea 186 To Set A Desired Speed o o 186 To Deactivate s sax sed ia des 187 To Resume Speed sssssss 187 To Vary The Speed Setting 187 To Accelerate For Passing Bl ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED sumas copian bee LY PESE s Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC TOACHV ate iu 39a citar ek iege eas To Set A Desired ACC Speed To Cancela Lada ue eae eR ed To Tutti Off cue ta SE To Resume lee To Vary The Speed Setting Setting The Following Distance In ACC Overtake Aid comia a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
35. 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the interior switches for door locks and power liftgate are disabled The Vehicle Secu rity Alarm provides both audio and visual signals the horn will sound the headlights will turn on park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three min utes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information For vehicl
36. 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Can two child restraints be at tached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor ages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen ger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child re straint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be removed Yes center position only 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are e found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
37. 3 Press and release the ENGINE START STOP button of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer once to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen wins for dirtier information The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure 354 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel 1 Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it 2 Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop
38. Assist System is malfunc tioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN SORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED appears in the EVIC see an authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense amp System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud
39. Collision Warning o oo ooo 213 Four Way Hazard Flasher 440 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 456 A INDEX 553 Front Axle Differential o o oo oooo 493 lul PC WELT 416 Adding 2 229 e RR eed wed ES d 420 Additives 0 sss ae a RR Rcx e AC CR e S 419 CGl an AE sua ct padres ced erede reote d 416 Ethanol MF 417 Gasoleo 3 923 04 9445 25 doa Rd eed d 416 Gauge iced zaiouadesad giria dites tela d 290 Materials Added 00 0 cee eens 419 Methanol i 226a 3 Re Rus 417 Octane Rating 416 Requirements sista ets eae eae s 416 Tank Capacity 6 6 6 eee 517 Fueling i m ke a me 420 BEusesS i iciaceeee ru die and 502 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 243 Gasoline Clean Air oo ooo oo os 416 Gasoline Fuel sumaria Ma Brae eta t aS cuoc 416 Gasoline Reformulated 000 0000 416 Gauges Coolant Temperature 6 0 0 2 000 0000 288 RUG ota P 290 Speedometer isse RE Coe ties 286 Tachometer car tede Bite ee wed Mane egens 285 Gear Ranges Lac teed ris SETS 358 General Information ss sesoses bsp eserdi kes tga 19 Glass Cleaning o i a ane g a a PR US 501 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0 427 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 426 GVWR eret ed es enced EXER A 424 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 1 6 6 eee eee 369 Hazard Warning Flasher 2
40. For further informa tion refer to Electronic Speed Control in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle EVIC Selectable Menu Items Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the EVIC Digital Speedometer Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Digital display icon is high lighted in the EVIC Press and release the N SPEED RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the sub menus and press the OK button to change the display between km h and mph Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow Vehicle Info Customer Information Features button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant Temp will be dis played Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the information sub menus and press the OK button to select or reset the following resettable sub menus Transmission Temperature Automatic Transmission Only Oil Temp Oil Life A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 Multimeter Engine Hours Tire Pressure Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Tire Pressure is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following will be displayed If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON If one or more tires have low pressure
41. GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed A STARTING AND OPERATING 425 Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehi
42. HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions Replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 WARNING General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transce
43. JO Removing Slack From Belt M z AN SN N Aj aa THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be shoulder belt adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing 9 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the button verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feat
44. Manual Park Release Lever 1 To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension upward while pushing the release latch towards the tether to unlock the lever 0605001180 Released Position NOTE To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention ally firmly apply the parking brake 0605001181 Release Latch 462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 2 Once the tension has been released and the lever has been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks into position Stowed Position NOTE Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in place TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the trans mission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting and Operating section The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Manual Park Release in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463 CAUTION Towing this vehicle using any other method could result in extensive damage to the transfer case and or transmission e Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE C
45. OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 30 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set you can increase speed by pushing the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 km h While the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display To decrease speed while the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released
46. Or Off With Troubleshooting Tips o o ooo o 250 Uconnect 8 45 8 4A lesse 240 General Information 0 251 W OVERHEAD CONSOLE 5 3 vxo mas 241 M POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 252 Front Map Reading Lights 241 Opening Sunroof Express 253 Courtesy Lights scel e etre 242 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 253 Sunglasses Bin Door ooooooooomo 242 Closing Sunroof Express 253 ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 243 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 253 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 244 Pinch Protect Feature 000 253 Programming A Rolling Code 245 Venting Sunroof Express 254 Programming A Non Rolling Code 247 Sunshade Operation 00 254 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Wind Buffeting e eicere emere 254 Pinch Protect Feature o oo oooooo o 258 Sunroof Maintenance 000 254 Wind Buffeting 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 c eae 258 Ignition OFF Operation 255 Sunroof Maintenance isle 259 E COMMANDVIEWG SUNROOF WITH POWER Ignition OFF Operation EEG AR aE OR OT eae os Sunroof Fully Closed esses CP O ERIE e 256 W ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
47. RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Unlock Enter The Liftgate The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate handle With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the electronic liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate Press the electronic lift gate handle and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In NOTE If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate will open with the handle and no RKE Transmitter is required 0222003451 Passive entry Lock Button Location 1 Electronic Release Switch 2 Lock Button Location To Lock The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the passive entry lock button located to the right of electronic liftgate handle NOTE The liftgate passive entry lock button will only lock the liftgate the liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed in EVIC all doors will unlock when you push the button on the liftgate If Unlock Driver Door 1st press is programmed in Uconnect the liftgate wi
48. Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 km h 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM While the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow cov
49. SCHEDULES HN 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear 11 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road condi tions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 11 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper loose ness or end play replace if necessary 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for po lice taxi fleet sustained high speed driving off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 535 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear 11 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engi
50. Unbuckled Front Seatbelts Unbuckled Key in Ignition Key in Ignition Lights On e e Remote Start Active Key to Run e Remote Start Active Push Start Button Door Open e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Doors Open Remote Start Aborted Too Cold e e Tailgate Open 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN e e e e e e e e Gear Not Available Shift Not Allowed Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse Paddle Shift Mode Unavailable Service Required Automatic Unavailable Use Paddle Shift Mode Service Required Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake Trans Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool Transmission Cool Ready to Drive Service Transmission Service Shifter Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On e Washer Fluid Low The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC Amber Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include Low Fuel Telltale When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator Se e eses This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind je shield washer fluid is low UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 e Low Coolant Level Indic
51. Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Und
52. Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate e Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
53. ahead Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET or SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II speed Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH KM will appear indicating what speed was set An indicator CRUISE will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set To Vary The Speed Setting When the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set you can increase speed by pushing the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 km h While the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The incr
54. and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies of your owners manual for more information CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off imme diately and call an authorized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap para graph ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 13 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE
55. any speed above 20 mph 30 km h To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if You push the Normal Fixed Speed ON OFF button You turn off the ignition You engage Four Wheel Drive Low FORWARD COLLISION WARNING FCW WITH MITIGATION IF EQUIPPED Forward Collision Warning FCW With Mitigation Operation The Forward Collision Warning FCW system with mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings visual warnings within the EVIC and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE frontal collision The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react avoid or mitigate the potential collision NOTE FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC to calculate the probability of a forward collision When the system determines that a forward collision is probable the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning If the driver does not take action based upon these progres sive warnings then the system will provide a limited level of autonomous braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but
56. automatically to the full open position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Power Shade Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the shade will close automatically from any 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mn position The shade will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the shade NOTE If the sunroof is open it will automatically close during the Sun Shade Express Close movement Closing Power Shade Manual Mode To close the shade press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Wind B
57. ball assem bly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle PARKVIEWG REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned OFF the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned ON The rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 MPH the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position When displayed dynamic grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to vehicle The following table shows the approximate a hitch receiver The static grid lines w
58. belt go around your lap Latch Plate 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop erly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Latch Plate To Buckle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your s abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause inter nal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and p
59. belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger e Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e Anenergy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters for front seat occupants a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s and second row center include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjust ing the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Ancho
60. booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 456 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the discharged vehicle Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi tive battery post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system tested at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engin
61. cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your autho rized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belt Lock Out The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless the rear seat upper latch is engaged Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HN Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
62. cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia bumper Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off if objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc are placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the instrument cluster On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle a UNDERSTAND
63. control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section NOTE Normal fixed speed cruise control will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 NORMAL FIXED SPEED CRUISE CONTROL ON OFF 2 SET ACCEL 3 RESUME 4 SET DECEL 5 DISTANCE SETTING INCREASE 6 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC ON OFF 7 DISTANCE SETTING DECREASE 8 CANCEL 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM NOTE Any chassis suspension or tire size modifica tions to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph 30 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays ACC Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following condition
64. d If Red Clutch ERUIPpe F68 20Amp Rear Wiper Motor MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F70 20 Amp Fuel Pump Motor F77 10 Amp Drivetrain Control Yellow Red Module Front Axle F71 30 Amp Audio Amplifier Disconnect Module Green F78 10 Amp Engine Control F73 15 Amp HID Headlamps Red Module Electric Blue Right Power Steering If F74 20 Amp Brake Vacuum Equipped Yellow Pump If F80 10 Amp Universal Garage Equipped Red Door Opener F76 10 Amp Antilock Brakes Compass lt PER Red Electronic Stability ntrusion Module Control F81 20 Amp Trailer Tow Right Yellow Turn Stop Lights 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Red Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F82 10 Amp Steering Column F87 10 Amp Air Suspension Red Control Module Red Trailer Tow Steer Cruise Control ing Column Con F83 10 Amp Fuel Door trol Module Red F88 15 Amp Instrument Panel F84 15 Amp Switch Bank Blue Cluster Blue Instrument Cluster F90 F91 20 Amp Power Outlet Rear F85 10 Amp Airbag Module Yellow seats Selectable Red F92 10 Amp Rear Console Lamp F86 10 Amp Airbag Module Red If Equipped Red F93 20 Amp Cigar Lighter Yellow F94 10 Amp Shifter Transfer Case Module
65. designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats 92261 0242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact and vehicle roll over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side N I 1 022640121 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 NOTE Air B
66. display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the pre
67. effects Continued Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so A STARTING AND OPERATING 371 CAUTION Continued e Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuri
68. entry system will also turn on If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lights With Remote Key This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn w
69. federal fire regula nozzle tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door Light to turn on open Continued e Pour fuel into funnel opening STARTING AND OPERATING 423 WARNING Continued A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the liftgate 7 2 Push down on the inboard edge of the left storage bin Release Cable this will pop up the outboard edge VEHICLE LOADING 3 Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to Certification Label disengage snaps As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin 4 Remove the storage bin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label 5 Pull the release cable affixed to the driver s side door or pillar 424 STARTING AND OPERATING HN This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The
70. for further information ParkSense Display The warning display will turn ON indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected O Park Assist cooktAd ooo 032774503 Park Assist Ready 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and or right rear regions based on the object s distance and location relative to the vehicle Tu Y AK eo MPH go NS If an object is detected in the left and or right rear region G RN the display will show a single arc in the lei and or ihi E i rear region and the system will produce a tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1 2 second tone to slow to fast A to continuous E S 140 0329001178 Single 1 2 Second Tone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 Slow Tone Fast Tone 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Continuous Tone 0329001175 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 WARNING ALERTS Reduced Rear D
71. front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact o a AD 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to mini
72. km h If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle NOTE ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC The system will not be controlling the distance be tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal To Cancel The following conditions cancel the system The brake pedal is applied You depress the brake pedal You press the CANCEL switch e An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 e A Trailer Sway Control TSC event occurs You push the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control s The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL ON OFF button e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys M E tem ESC TCS activates e You switch to Four Wheel Drive Low The vehicle parking brake is applied To Resume EN Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds If there is a set speed in memory press the RES resume Dd datl d button and then remove your foot from the accelerator ini ae pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed The driver switches ESC to full off
73. mode NOTE NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off If hicle st t standstill for 1 th ESC will automatically be re engaged dE ins Ripa fdv GMO dra M UNDC dT 2 seconds then the driver will either have to press the To Turn Off Resume button or apply the throttle to reengage the The system will turn off and clear the set speed in ACC to the existing Set Speed memory if e ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle You push the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON in front of your vehicle in close proximity OFF button 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing the SET button Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 km h If the SET button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display While A
74. not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be che
75. octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Continued 420 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning WARNING Continued Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can ADDING FUEL 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located under the headlamp switch kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle
76. of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 CAUTION CAUTION Continued Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than Bo not use water alone Ur alcoholmbesta engine specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not damage and may decrease corrosion protection be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is d
77. oil level must be checked under the hood e Oil Temperature Warning Light This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is 87 high If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential elec trical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light YA This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However
78. on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle The tongue weight of the trailer The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers STARTING AND OPERATING 431 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading In formation Placard in Starting and Operating for fur ther information Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended 432 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION WARNING Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as or other parts could be damaged possible
79. or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED Heated Steering Wheel With Uconnect 5 0 If Equipped The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 30 to 95 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your bank below the climate controls There are also soft keys Vehicle for further information in the radio screen that will activate the heated steering wheel WARNING Press the switch to turn on the heated e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin steering wheel The light on the switch because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes will illuminate to indicate the steering spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus wheel heater is on Pressing the switch tion or other physical conditions must exercise a second time will turn off the heated care when using the steering wheel heater It may 0
80. outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high A STARTING AND OPERATING 399 speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when fl
81. precau s tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the NOTE On four wheel drive vehicles be sure that the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re transfer case is in a drive position verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when RNING the engine is idling normally and your foot is e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the ely presang He brake pedal parking brake Always apply the parking brake Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure fully when parked to guard against vehicle move those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles ment and possible injury or damage you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFE and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is e Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued Continued 360 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued CAUTION
82. restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH Second Row 60 40 Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position WARNING Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 Vehicles With A Center Arm Rest Tether For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat position with the vehicle seat belts the rear center seat position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the upward position 1 To access the center seat arm rest tether first lower the arm rest The tether is located behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing 022633125 Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether 2 Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat backing 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VE
83. road or frequent trailer H T Replace the spark plugs towing E The spark plug change interval is mileage based only monthly intervals do not apply U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8 Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center M A l N T E N A N Cc E S C H E B U L E S 8 532 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES INN 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear 11 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road condi tions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 11 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper loose ness or end play replace if necessary 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
84. so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted restraint To lower the head restraint press the push forward and rearward To tilt the hea
85. station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you shou
86. steering col umn The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 031563090 Multifunction Lever a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Windshield Wiper Operation CAUTION Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur 031563345 Windshield Wiper Operation 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when A weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable delay between cycles desirable At driving speeds above 10 mph 16 km h the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles first detent to a cycle every one second fourth detent 031563345 Intermittent Wiper Operation NOTE If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer push on the end of
87. that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking R
88. the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB I
89. the engine rev limiter speed 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 6 Release the brake pedal Pressing the launch control button when launch control is active will deactivate launch control NOTE Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum RPM and waits for the driver to release the brake Launch Mode then uses engine throttle only to achieve controlled wheelslip for maximum acceleration through first gear e Launch Mode can be initiated in any of the Select Trac Modes Launch Mode is not available until the 500 mile break in has been achieved Screen Setup Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow sme button until the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup sub menu The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Odometer e 000 e 000 0 Upper Left e None Compass A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 e e e e e e e e e Outside Temp default setting Trans Temp Oil Temp Time Range To Empty RTE Average MPG Current MPG Trip A Trip B Trailer Trip distance only Trailer Brake Gain Upper Right e None Compass default setting Outside Temp Trans Temp Oil Temp Time Range To Empty RTE Average MPG Current MPG
90. the lever toward the steering wheel and hold while spray is desired If the a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting the If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles the off position the wipers will operate for several wipe after the end of the lever is released and then resume the cycles then turn off intermittent interval previously selected WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make 031563350 occasional usage of the wipers necessary Rotate the end Windshield Washer Operation of the lever downward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping cycle 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid 031563345 Mist Control Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially usef
91. this tire Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 390 STARTING AND OPERATING In Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The
92. to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Continued window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 7 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the hard key button for warmer tempera ture settings or on the touch screen press and slide the soft key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft key for warmer temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the hard key button for cooler temperature 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN settings or on the touch screen press and slide the soft key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft key for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this butto
93. track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of the front seats This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column and a Knee Bolster mounted below the glove compartment NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Air Bag
94. will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 20 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off 21 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ee 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buz
95. your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the Continued 404 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more
96. your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a tempera ture drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result Continued a STARTING AND OPERATING 411 CAUTION Continued e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent mois ture and dirt from entering the valve stem which cou
97. 00 440 Headlighis s tee c e e E em ets Bulb Replacement 554 INDEX IN On With Wipers ses iaei em ehh es 164 PASSING as sonder ed RR Rep alee Rage dod 173 Replacing i peek ide bebe doe REOS 513 Heated Mirrors l l 126 High Beam Indicator o o ooooooooooo o 286 Hitches Trailer Towing 424 hee RD Re a 429 HomeLink Garage Door Opener 243 Hood Release o o oooooooo ooo 161 Ignition A 4r eee e 14 Illuminated Entry llle 22 Immobilizer Sentry Key oooooooooooo 17 Infant Restraint essersi enrgia ta oa eG a 82 Inside Rearview Mirror llle 121 Instrument Cluster llle 285 Instrument Panel and Controls 283 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 501 Interior Appearance Care oooooooo ooo ooo o 500 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 176 Introd ction 4s Re awe ee bead 4 Inverter POWEL cerere disse ani es 264 Jacking Instructions o oooooooooooooooo 445 Jack Location llle 441 Jack Operation llle 445 Jump Staring 36 cis ee ta ee ee Gis te e 452 Key In Reminder oooooooooooooooo nooo 16 Keyless Enter N Go 0 0 00 esee 35 Keyless Entry System o oooooooooo ooo oooo 23 Keyless GO cs ster is og nn ERR SOR ed a 14 Key Programming 6 eee eee eee 19 Key Replacement 2 6 0 6 0 6 c eee eee 18 Key Sie kay as ned aed Se le aie wen 14 Key Sentry
98. 1 4 mile within 25 seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will display when conditions are met for the event to begin e 0 0s will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1 8 mile 1 4 mile in less then 25 seconds The time will continue to display until the vehicle is brought to a stop Instantaneous G Force When selected this screen displays the current G Force lateral and longitudinal Peak G Force When selected this screen displays all four G Force values two lateral and two longitudinal When a force greater than zero is measured the display will update the value as it climbs As the G Force falls the peak forces will continue to display Pressing and holding the OK button for five seconds will clear the peak force values Launch Mode If Equipped This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight line racing 1 Bring vehicle to complete stop on a level track surface with the engine running 2 Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving 3 Fully press the brake pedal 4 Press and release the LAUNCH Button 5 Press the accelerator pedal to the floor NOTE If the cluster launch EVIC message indicates all conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is pressed to the floor quickly within approximately 1 2 second the system will hold the engine speed to a preset speed below
99. 14 To Disarm The SysteM o oooooooo ooo 21 Key Eoia es dene eet bath gate oa eas 15 Tamper Alert aes RR cams ta pe oes 22 Ignition Or Accessory On Message 16 B ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED 22 M SENTRY KEY 000 0 0000 17 M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE 23 Replacement Keys ooooooooooooo oo 18 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 24 Customer Key Programming 19 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 25 General Information o oooooooooo o 19 Using The Panic Alarm o ooooooooo 25 Ml VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED 20 O Programming Additional Transmitters 26 Rearming The System o o o o o o ooo 20 Transmitter Battery Replacement 26 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM General Information 00 27 W OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS x3 e 48 ll REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 28 Lap Shoulder Bells 42 vex he ki yas 52 How To Use Remote Start 29 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 53 E DOOR LOCKS iusso kodak ar OE See ea 32 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 57 Power Door Locks o oooooooooo o 33 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 57 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Seat Belts In Passenger Seatin
100. 31705825 steering wheel and light indicator cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Heated Steering Wheel With Uconnect 8 4 8 4A The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 30 to 95 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel soft key is located in the radio screen that will activate the heated steering wheel Press the soft key to turn on the heated steering wheel The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on Pressing the soft key a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator NOTE The engine m
101. 470 A INDEX 551 Defroster Rear Window 0 0000005 277 Defroster Windshield 109 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 489 Door LOCKS 34 04 8005 204448 Ee eed aw X E 32 Door Opener Garages otsa smert Praa nR E Fa 243 Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Wateren eue a a RC PRA 369 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 259 Electric Rear Window Defrost 277 Electric Remote Mirrors lessen 125 Electronic Brake Control SysteM 375 Brake Assist System ooooooocococooo o 377 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 377 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 185 Electronic Stability Control ESC 378 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 292 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 456 Hazard Warning Flasher o o o o 440 dera ses essa asas tata aS REOR RR d 452 Tow HOOKS lt 6 cae Ree bebe ew ded 458 Emission Control System Maintenance 468 Engines cerere abend RE esre mistas 467 Air Cleaner i ccrcsssresrossssi eh 475 Break In Recommendations 106 Checking Oil Level ooooooommoooo o 471 Compartment oee a es na a aia E a ea an g 467 Coolant Antifreeze 2 eee auna 485 Cooling x ege pev WES CHER a 485 Exhaust Gas Caution oooooooooo ooo 48 Fails to Start cese be ehe 352 F
102. 533 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months or 150 000 miles 250 000 km whichever comes first Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Q Drain the transfer case and refill 11 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet sustained high speed driving off road or frequent trailer towing a a a a a a ood Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Q1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A l N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N Cc E S C H E B U L E S 8 534 MAINTENANCE
103. 68 ll AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 354 E DRIVING THROUGH WATER 369 Key Ignition Park Interlock 356 Flowing Rising Water cies 370 346 STARTING AND OPERATING HN E POWER STEERING se eese 372 W TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 385 E FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY Tire Markings esce Rem ROS 385 ELE uma Loewe Ol ewes aes ane Tire Identification Number TIN 388 ESI BRAND i e a e ve Tire Terminology And Definitions 390 Bi ELEG TRONI BRARE COB TROL BESTEN vou Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 391 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 376 E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 396 acontecen G Tire Pressure llle 396 Brake Assist Sya ABAS est tinke ren u Tire Inflation Pressures o o o oo 397 FISGHODUE Ror MINANA ERM IO RS dd Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 398 Electronic Stability Control ESC 378 Radial Ply Tires esee 399 Teller Way Coptol Ot NE E 959 Tire Types esses 400 o And Run Flat Tires lesse eese 401 ESC OFF Indicator Light 383 A STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Spare lir S 3 cie oe eme 401 Reformulated Gasoline o o oo o o 416 Tir
104. 8 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 Paint Care acuosos e PS exea d Panic Alarm ese RR a Bae ea a a Parking Brake oscar e eo nega Park Sense System Rear o oooooommoooo oo Passing Light ize xem EE E l Tn Pets Transporte ciae tke rho cR eq Placard Tire and Loading Information 558 INDEX In Power Distribution Center Fuses 502 Door Locks iia ke ko 33 HIV CECE cto aoi ss detnr soy die qd dee did 264 Lift Gate zi seid Phebe aw RE EUH a Bee 45 o o de ate Ritt deter E eR den GA d eie E 125 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 259 Seats sues n ek E P duane eae a 138 TESTS ivoire wee ane Red In UR edens 372 DUNE cse Gee wae pa eda Sahay 252 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 181 WindOWS ise b 6453 4 nao p ERE RET 40 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 65 Preparation for Jacking o ooooooooo 444 Pretensioners Seat Belts veu sap era Rep Uus 60 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 23 Radial Ply Tires Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 488 Radio Operation xs aaah RR ook ds eee te 332 Radio Remote Controls o o o o ooo o ooo 330 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 0 178 Rear Axle Differential o o ooo 493 Rear Gamera pis gh ead be ac ae does RU Ae doe 238 Rear Cross Path 0 0 eee ee 135 Rear Cupholder i sod sis rS tare eames 265 Rear Park Sense System oo
105. 8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two sec onds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine NOTE A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are
106. ALERTS Reduced Rear Distance Greater than 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Arc None 4th Solid 3rd 2nd 1st Solid Flashing Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes NOTE ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Enabling And Disabling ParkSense amp ParkSense amp can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch Pya OFF When the ParkSense switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or requires service The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled If the ParkSense switch is pressed and the system requires service the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park
107. ATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences i e seat side mirror power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station pre sets Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch Within 5 seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC will display which memory posi tion has been set Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Insert the ignition key fob and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch 4 Within 5 seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display which memory position has been set 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to Memory
108. Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and in
109. Air Cleaner Filter 475 Air Conditioner Maintenance o 477 Air Conditioning Filter 342 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 343 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 477 Air Conditioning System llle 340 Air Pressure Tires ce llle 397 Alarm Panne 223 3 Rode t ee ree Ree 25 Alarm Security Alarm llle 20 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antifreeze Engine Coolant soseste aaka isa 486 Disposal 22 5 24 e REX Red e d 489 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 376 Anti Lock Warning Light 285 A e ege RR es 293 Appearatice Care ia sss cse ieee RES 497 Auto Down Power Windows lees 41 Automatic Headlights o oooooooo o 164 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 340 Automatic Transmission ooooooooo 357 Adding Fluid ocaeca ransas 496 AULOSHCK vs vache a SE RES RES baie eS Ae us 364 Fluid and Filter Changes 0 496 Fluid Change iiem eee eee 496 Fluid Level Check o oo oo ooooo oo 495 Fluid Type cot e edere Recte acu 495 Gear Ranges cues antag Ci a ead E eR eia 358 Special Additives 4 sace nik baa rar Eod 495 a INDEX 549 Autostick coi dele daw es 364 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 259 Auxiliary Power Outlet oooooo oo 259 Battety oae se aeree ir Ed medo hd 475 Keyless Transmitter Replacem
110. Body Side Turn Signal Lamps Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps 7440NA WY21W LED Service at Authorized Dealer Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 W16W Headlamps High Beam 9005 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Bulb Number Rear License Lamps LED Service at Authorized Dealer Rear Body Side Turn 3157 P27 7W Stop Lamps Rear Body Side Tail LED Service at Lamps Authorized Dealer CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED Service at Authorized Dealer NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 NOTE On v
111. C Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the EVIC will display the park assist ready system status P R N D S Park Assist oooRe8d ooo 032774503 Park Assist Ready 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and or right rear regions based on 1 the object s distance and location relative to the vehicle 0 If an object is detected in the left and or right rear region the display will show a single arc in the left and or right P rear region and the system will produce a tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone wy will change from a single 1 2 second tone to slow to fast lt to continuous 002 032774502 Single 1 2 Second Tone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 0 0 j j 3 SZ SZ SSES S 032774501 032774500 002 0 U ZJ Slow Tone Fast Tone 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In O SZ Continuous Tone 0029 032774499 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert opera tion when the system is detecting an obstacle a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 WARNING
112. CC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing the SET button Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 km h If the SET button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 NOTE may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed When driving up hill and down hill the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range overheated e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the Setting The Following Distance In ACC mm engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system The specified following distance for ACC can be set by will automatically slow the vehicle varying the distance setting between four bars longest three bars long two bars medium and one bar short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC e When you override and push the SET button or SET buttons the current vehicle speed will become the set speed of the system The ACC system applies the
113. Center a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 527 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Q Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 11 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the CV joints 11 Inspect exhaust system 21 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 528 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES INN 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or Schedule 66 Months Maintenance 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule T Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear T Change the engine oil and engine oil 11 Replace th
114. Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires transmission to be in PARK before the engine can be turned to the OFF This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Eight Spe
115. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 546 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Tempe
116. DERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Pa ien Set the mode control to 72 vehicle interior is very AIC on and blower on high Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the shes hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort o Tum A C on and set the mode control to the position gt Cool Sunny Operate in position Cool amp Humid conditions 06 sl Set the mode control to xf and turn on A C to keep 55600 UM 66 c windows clear e Set the mode control to the position If windshield Cold Weather fogging starts to occur move the control towards the We 0456001003 position STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Bl STARTING PROCEDURES 349 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 356 Automatic Transmission 349 Eight Speed Automatic Transmission 357 Keyless Enter N Go Loco oo 350 M PADDLE SHIFT MODE Normal Starting ds ii aa da 350 Operation ERR dde e qe dies Extreme Cold Weather B SELEC TRACO IF EQUIPPED is sn 366 PAW UE Cree stffopdopsteriens a Descriptions vs karen nea PEE dons aad 366 If Engine Fails To Start 352 Active Damping System 0000005 368 D After Starting bo OER e n 354 Launch Mode If Equipped 3
117. Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room Rear Seat Release 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e Do not fold the 6095 rear seat down with the left outboard or rear center seat belt buckled Do not fold the 40 rear seat down with the right outboard seat belt buckled 2 Fold the rear seat completely forward 030909671 Rear Seat Folded To Raise Rear Seat Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place If interfer ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stabil ity for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system Reclining Rear Seat To recline the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position
118. G THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 min utes Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect 8 4 8 4A If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compart ment and pull air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures To operate the system press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect display Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level ventilation Press the soft key a second time to select LO level ventilation Press the soft key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted
119. HICLE HI 3 Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint strap located on the front of the arm rest 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages 022633126 9 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for PH that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 4 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions Test
120. HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channe
121. ING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 CAUTION WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when Continued using ParkSense 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Continued Before using ParkSenseG it is strongly recom mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
122. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immedia
123. Immobilizer o o oooooooo o 17 ee INDEX 555 Lane Change Assist 3 iss em m hem s 173 Lap Shoulder Belts cree RR tiina 52 Latches nasse LER REE DIA IP 111 Lead Free Gasoline ooooooooommoooo ooo 416 Leaks Eli sosa id es 111 AAA deg BAe AE er ORE rod 405 Liftgate odis p ate hod ERE ma Pe Reb Beta 44 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 276 JR DAL o 00 a a A 1 Lights oia ovas a Rena e 111 A nad ramer peed take eo ee be 74 AntcLockz icon ost ieee wena dee ees PS 285 Automatic Headlights 164 Back Up iit tero a do den acp ta 514 Brake Assist Warning 00 383 Brake Warning cies o ope pee a 289 Bulb Replacement ss cess atesta soa taa mesis 512 CAIgO aege eee need E S e n a 271 Center Mounted Stop 06 516 Daytime Running s ssaa seei eee ca eae 166 Dimmer Switch Headlight 163 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 383 juu P TC IT 111 A T DIO 286 Hazard Warning Flasher 440 Headlights necem 512 Headlights On With Wipers 164 High Beam Indicator o o ooooo o ooo o 286 Illuminated Entry ooooooooooooooooo 22 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 286 Map Reading 000000000 170 Passing iia aep AN SRS Bas aie 173 Reading 0 0 0 sceri soes eesis 170 Rear Servicing acnes a eo oes ne ees ea ee 514 Rear Tail ise rinde uma Legem s 514 Seat Be
124. It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued 030933466 Fold Flat Passenger Seat a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 WARNING Continued Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion Front Heated Seats With Uconnect 5 0 If Equipped There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located in the Uconnect system screen You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Press the Climate hard key located on the right side of the Uconnect display Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will b
125. NDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exis
126. O Reg uns 127 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Monitor Tire Pressure System o o o o o o 409 Mopar Parts os ks ed oan SER EE E 470 MTBE ETB 0000 dence ace ORC ee eka RO d 417 Multi Function Control Lever 163 A INDEX 557 New Vehicle Break In Period 106 Occupant Restraints gt secre sos eol esa e eed 48 Occupant Restraints Sedan o o o oo o 70 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 416 Odometer 0 0 0 ce ee eee 292 MPa dS doe pd rq doe gee Rr ed sc 292 Oil Engine iiec kad See awe eae ee dae 471 Capacity discessus es n e os deta tees 517 Change Interval seu Rats 472 Checking 2 se des ep tamed comes yews A71 Disposal cc 623 0 eetateteeeie teense 474 Filtrar oui each oye aaa a Ea PS 474 Filter Disposal 0 0 00 0005 474 Identification Logo ooooooooommooo 473 Materials Added to o o oooooo o o 474 Recommendation o 473 Synthetie aiii ea Rep Red 474 VISCOSILY iier e e RODA Pa eR RR eed 474 Oil Filter Selection o ooooooo oo o o 474 Onboard Diagnostic SysteM o oooooooo oo 468 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 243 Operating Precautions eee 468 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0 0 123 Overhead Console 0 ooo 241 Overheating Engine 0 0 0 0 002 ee eee 28
127. OMPARTMENT 64L 467 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 468 ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ssueese eee 468 W REPLACEMENT PARIS 3 23 28008 ERR Red 470 B DEALER SERVICE ur rh RR Rm 470 E MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 471 H Engine Oil ere gs tee eet RR a A71 Engine Oil Filter ooooo ooooo 474 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 475 Maintenance Free Battery 475 Air Conditioner Maintenance 477 Body Lubrication oooooooooomo 479 Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System 00 ooo oo Cooling System nee ke ee Brake System o oooooooooooooooooo 491 D Front Rear Axle Fluid 493 Transfer Case ue Bin sae gee Di ee FW 494 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Automatic Transmission Ls 495 Appearance Care And Protection From COILOSIOD vw ky o s RR RE ERE E RS 497 B FUSES 2 RB ie Rea 502 POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER 502 WM VEHICLE STORAGE 0 510 E REPLACEMENT BULBS 510 E BULB REPLACEMENT 512 High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped s 42044 seii miea a e ees 512 Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 513 Front
128. PPED This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage STARTING AND OPERATING 373 Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate 374 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE WARNING When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage e When leavi
129. R KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 7 START STOP 0 5 ENGINE 0202001141 Keyless Ignition Node KIN Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob
130. REA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight a The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of Press And Release the cargo area The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high needed The flashlight features two bright LED light twice for low and a third time to return to off bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place Press in on the flashlight to release it UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer the passenger side cargo area will not be available 035410217 Three Press Switch Cargo Storage Bins Rear Storage Bin There are four removable storage bins located in the rear cargo area There are two storage bins located on either side of the cargo area 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Two additional storage bins are located under the load floor To access the lower storage bins raise the load floor and attach the tether hook attached to the bottom of the load floor to the liftgate opening lj pu 0352003318 So 1 a Lower Storage Bins 035409796 Tether Strap aa UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped s 4 AN NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting o
131. Standard MS 12106 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exceed 7076 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage Drain flush and refill as soon as possible to avoid damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do
132. The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 0202003287 Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM 020241333 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or
133. To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever 7 030909670 Rear Seat Release WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans mitters One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to memory position 2 The memory seat switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The switch consists of three buttons e The S button which is used to activate the memory save function e The 1 and 2 buttons which are used to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles Memory Seat Switch Programming The Memory Feature NOTE To create a new memory profile perform the following a UNDERSTANDING THE FE
134. Turn Signal Front Fog Lamps lt i 6 4 4 04 e 513 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup LAMPS 5o co ee oe eee ea wae st 514 Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 515 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 516 Rear License Lamp ooooo ooooo oo 516 E FLUID CAPACITIES 208293322 EE 517 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARIS 1222 64095 a dd ege deis 518 Enpirie i eoe iem ee Pe y ARP ea ed 518 Cla 515 eg oem eR eee RES gs 519 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 4L 0745001495 1 Power Distribution Center Fuses 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Washer Fluid Reservoir 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic co
135. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instruc tions UN
136. YOUR VEHICLE 479 6 Install the A C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 7 Rotate the glove compartment door back into position Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshiel
137. You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 397 WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat terns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a m
138. a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other infor mation about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety 544 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A
139. a en Jacking Instructions oooooooooo o 445 M OWING A DEABLED VENUE Gu tiie ee aoe O Road Tire Installation 451 440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the
140. a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack Continued 442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Run Flat Tires This vehicle is equipped with a compact spare along with run flat tires Although the tires are designed with a run flat feature that allows the vehicle to be driven approxi mately 50 miles 80 km at 55 mph 88 km h immediate service should be obtained NOTE The compact spare tire is to be used for the rear wheel s only For a flat front tire move the rear tire to the front and use the compact spare on the rear Compact Spare Tire Label 0605001489 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 443 WARNING e Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h if the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light is illuminated Vehicle handling and braking may be reduced You could have a collision and be severely or fatally injured Do not tow a trailer when using the compact spare tire Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in rear cargo area below the load floor Jack Storage Location Spare Tire Stowage The
141. acement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 407 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failur
142. ag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags and SABIC air bags during impacts that require side air bag occupant protection 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with left and right SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain air bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the SAB the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and us
143. ains an ASSIST push button which automatically connects the vehicle occupants to one of several predefined locations for immediate support e Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire or need a tow just press the Assist button and you ll be con nected to someone who can help Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you re driving and its location Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance e Uconnect Access Customer Care In vehicle support for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access via Mo bile features e Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other vehicle issues 9 1 1 Call Report an accident without taking your eyes off the road Just press 9 1 1 on your mirror and connect CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance o
144. ake fluid level should be checked when WARNING Continued pads are replaced If the brake fluid is abnormally low check system for leaks To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in been in a tightly closed container Keep the master Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake WARNING Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued Continued a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 WARNING Continued Do not al
145. alf second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatic
146. ality Clean Front Windshield message occurs frequently e g more than once on every trip without any snow rain mud or other obstruction have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer Removing ACC Sensor For Off Roading NOTE When off roading it may be advisable to remove the ACC sensor The sensor is located behind the front lower grille in the center of the vehicle After removing the lower fascia you may remove the lower sensor and bracket assembly 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In To remove the sensor follow these instructions 1 Unplug the connector by depressing the two tabs on the connector and pulling it out Do not pull by the wiring or use any tools to remove the connector 2 Remove the wiring christmas tree attachment from the back of the bracket 3 Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect the bracket to the bumper NOTE Do not change the adjustment fasteners or pull the sensor off of the bracket Doing so may misalign the sensor Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a safe location The wiring and connector must be stowed properly after the sensor and bracket assembly is removed A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper beam Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug NOTE When the sensor is removed Adaptive Cruise Control Normal Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning will not be available and the forward collisio
147. allon MPG Bar graph e Range To Empty RTE e Current Miles Per Gallon MPG Audio Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio display icon is high lighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the sub menus and press the OK button display the active source A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 SRT e 1 8 Mile WARNING 1 4 Mile m Instantaneous G Force Measurement of vehicle statistics with the perfor mance pages is intended for off highway or off road Peak G Force use only and should not be done on any public roadways It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the To access press and release either the UP or DOWN limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as arrow button until SRT appears in the EVIC then press measured by the performance pages must never be and release the RIGHT arrow button to cycle through the exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which features Press the OK button to select a feature can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents Timers 0 60 mph 0 100 km h Launch Mode If Equipped The following describes each feature and its operation The Performance Features include the following e 0 60 mph 0 100 km h When selected this screen displays the time it takes for
148. ally as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel aaa UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information COMMANDVIEWG SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE IF EQUIPPED The Command View sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console 034433149 CommandViewO Sunroof and Power Shade Switches The power shade switch is l
149. an allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened by pressing 0222003484 2v the electronic liftgate handle refer to Keyless Enter N Go located in Things To Know Before Starting or by pressing the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the 1 Electronic Release Switch 2 Lock Button Location LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate Passive Entry Lock Button Location 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by NOTE pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front overhead console or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim panel near the liftgate opening Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim panel once will close the liftgate only this button cannot be used to open the liftgate When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is pressed two times the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC and the liftgate chime will be audible For further informati
150. and death or serious personal injury The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming vehicles and stationary objects e g a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Continued 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING Continued e Cannot take street traffic and weather condi tions into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings e Can only apply a maximum of 40 of the vehi cle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop WARNING You should switch off the ACC system When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations i e in highway construction zones When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are winding icy snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes e When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes e When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 The Cruise Control system has two control modes Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles e Normal fixed speed cruise
151. aner or equivalent or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPARG Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products
152. arning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Limited Functionality or ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield momentarily there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions the active braking may not be fully available 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present the system will return to its full performance state If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays e ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required e Cruise FCW Unavailable Service Required This indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense
153. artBeams e sesi ceea i ae ee 165 SHOW Tresserre ak Sear li TCI T TET 400 Spare Tires scce ferum oer e e deh RE E 402 Speed Control Cruise Control 185 Speedometeti s exceder b eR Rai oe A PR 286 sri 28 Automatic Transmission 349 Cold Weather lees 352 Engine Fails to Start o o ooo o o o ooo 352 Retiotle sceso terriero PESO eee Ee ER 28 Starting and Operating 0 349 Starting Procedures 0 000 000 0080 349 Steering POWER fests aot asked Ra CX URS RR E Rp 372 Tilt Columht socie aaa ey De ache a Res 180 Wheel THE iia e exa Ae ea 180 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 330 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls Storage A INDEX 561 Storage Vehicles za es iss Remi ido ea ike 341 storing Your Vehiele ss s brem Ee dea 510 Sunglasses Storage si edes rae i a 242 Sun Roof a ft scien donated pee estan tst tense ale a 252 Sun Visor Extension siii cce e ee e ae 128 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 66 Sway Control Trailer cc ecesas tetas netiria ss 383 Synthetic Engine Oil o o o o ooooo oo o oo o 474 System Remote Starting o o o o oo 28 Tachometer avioneta sii 285 Telescoping Steering Column 180 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 340 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 288 Tie Down Hooks Cargo ooooooooomooo o ooo 274 Tilt Steering ColumM oooo
154. ary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 EXAMPLE R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits 388 STARTING AND OPERATING HN EXAMPLE Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
155. at e The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable and e The puncture is no greater than V 6 mm 400 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Code Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you nee
156. at setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Front Collision Sensitivity If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far or set to Near The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you whe
157. ated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SAB air bags and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
158. ator WARNING This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle i If you continue operating the vehicle when the coolant level is low PA j tas Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi nated you could cause the fluid to boil over come in e Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale contact with hot engine or exhaust components and This telltale indicates that the transmission US EE m fluid temperature is running hot This may EvIC Red Telltales occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this telltale turns on safely pull over and This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEU telltales include TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light Door Ajar turns off es This light will turn on to indicate that one or CAUTION 4 more doors may be ajar Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN e Oil Pressure Warning Light AN This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine
159. ay result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals M A N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A l N T E N A N ie E S ie H E B U L E S 8 524 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES INN 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Servic
160. ble e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto On Driver HeatedlVentilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 min
161. brakes when following the host vehicle and will hold the brakes at a complete stop for 2 seconds and then release The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM JE JEN 0323001262 0323001261 Distance Setting 4 Bars Longest Distance Setting 3 Bars Long a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 NIN 0323001260 0323001259 Distance Setting 2 Bars Medium Distance Setting 1 Bar Short 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II To increase the distance setting press the Distance Set ting Increase button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting increases by one bar longer To decrease the distance setting press the Distance Setting Decrease button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting decreases by one bar shorter If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or vie
162. brasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Continued 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II CAUTION Continued Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To move the crossbars loosen the attachments located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately eight turns using the anti theft wrench provided with the MOPAR crossbars Then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in the desired positio
163. c before considering disc player service 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the Automatic Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display When the Uconnect system is in different modes Ra dio Player Settings More etc the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 General Overview Soft Keys Hard Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect system screen The hard keys located below the Uconnect screen Vals 50 OO 0456001381 0456002846 Uconnect 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Soft keys Automatic Climate Controls Hard keys 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Button Descriptions Appli
164. can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets Bi Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demis ter outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 Floor Mode re J Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode D Air comes from the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions Defrost Mode ov Air comes from the windshield and side win dow demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may will increase 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN 12 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 13 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the hard key button for cooler temperature settings or on the touch screen press and slide the soft key temperat
165. carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the
166. ccur when the message was previously cleared WARNING In the ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled There fore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESC Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only NOTE When the ESC is switched OFE a feature of the system remains active This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with tire chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch WARNING With the ESC switched OFF the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESC mode is intended for off highway or off road only ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 Trailer Sway Conirol TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to s
167. ce free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur Continued 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Continued Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s bat tery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to de grade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting WARNING e When temperatures are below the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Battery temperature must be brought above the freezing point before attempting a jump start Continued WARNING Continued e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammab
168. child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of
169. cked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 5076 OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 Make sure that the coolant
170. cle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle Weigh ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 426 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles T
171. creen Set Up e RIGHT Arrow Button Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to access the information screens or sub menu EVIC Buttons screens of a main menu item 040974118 gt e BACK Arrow Button Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the 1 main menu from an info screen or sub menu item e OK Button The OK button may be used for the following Selection Reset hold Clearing hold Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the cluster and consists of eight sections ON 0 AeA Q 7 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 Main Screen The inner ring of the display will illuminate in grey under normal conditions yellow for non critical warnings red for critical warnings and white for on demand information Audio Phone Information and Sub menu Informa tion Whenever there are sub menus available the position within the sub menus is shown here m Reconfigurable Telltales Information Telltales Indicators Shift Lever Status PRNDS Selectable Information Compass Temp Range to Empty Trip A Trip B Average MPG Selectable Gauge 2 Selectable Gauge 1 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 p
172. d Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the headlight switch is rotated to the its farthest upward position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its farthest position up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day 031409585 Dimmer Control 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Lights On Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If th
173. d To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door 021809601 Manual Door Lock Knob WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Continued Power Door Locks e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key The power door lock switch is located on each front door Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle Unsu panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause se vere personal injuries or death Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could Power Door Lock Switch operate power
174. d Upon a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 release of the switch the wipers will resume the continu ous rear wiper operation When this rotary control is in the OFF position rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle several times before returning to the parked position NOTE As a protective measure the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds Once the switch is released the pump will resume normal operation If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear mm window defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use a
175. d Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it a forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder lt re XS NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up 4 Wiper Blade ward unless the pivot cap is raised first 2 Blade Pivot Pin N 3 Wiper Arm 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper 4 Wiper Blade Holder blade off of the liftgate glas
176. d engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear T Replace the engine air cleaner filter 11 Drain the transfer case and refill 1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road condi tions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 2 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper loose ness or end play replace if necessary 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for po lice taxi fleet sustained high speed driving off road or frequent trailer towing D Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service
177. d rear axle in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 500 mi 800 km After the initial 60 mi 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in However wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil is a high performance synthetic lubricant the transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high quality and energy conserving Oil fluid a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107 and lubricant changes should be consistent with antici pated climate and conditions under which vehicle opera tions will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a ca
178. d restraint closer to button located at the base of the head restraint and push the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the downward on the head restraint head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head em 030907490 Push Button 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable EIL DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or Active Head Restraint Tilted death 030907533 NOTE Continued The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued The center head restraint has limited adjustment Lift z upward on the head restraint to raise it or push down Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are ward on the head restraint to lower it struck by a
179. d snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 401 Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Run Flat Tires Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the run flat mode A run flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the Tire Pressure Monitoring Section for mo
180. d with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily A STARTING AND OPERATING 437 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Recreational towing is not allowed CAUTION Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS E HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 440 W JUMP STARTING 00 0005 452 E IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 440 Preparations For Jump Start 453 E JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 441 Jump Starting Procedure 455 Run Flat TireS ooooooooo 442 B FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 456 Jack Location seen 443 M EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED 458 mm Spare Tire Stowage s sedoso cim od tasad md 443 M MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED Preparations For Jacking 444 TRANE MIN to eee ie
181. de steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued Air Bag Warning Light Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may o You will want to have the air bags ready to 2 o not function properly if modifications are made ry inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any i a a circuits and interconnecting wiring associated air bag system service If your seat including your TE with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during modify the air bag system for persons with dis the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first abilities contact your authorized dealer cycled to the ON RUN The
182. denser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance MAX A C MAX A C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor mance Press and release to toggle between MAX A C and the prior settings The soft key illuminates when MAX A C is ON UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 In MAX A C the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A C operation to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A C indicator will turn off Recirculation When outside air contains smoke odors or CE high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation feature may be unavailable soft button greyed out if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN the windshield On systems with Manual Climate Con trols the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recircula tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is se lected Attempting to use Recirculati
183. des and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration me For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test
184. dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system oper ating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense e When you turn ParkSense OFF the instrument clus ter will display PARKSENSE OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned OFF the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II e e ParkSense when on will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc are placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the EVIC
185. e 437 Traction Control voor rte em 376 Trailer Sway Control TSC 383 Trailer TOWING ikea eo hea Soe ee ea here a E 426 Cooling System Tips oooooooo ooo 436 Hitches oe soii e RR Ee e e 429 Minimum Requirements 4 4 431 Trailer and Tongue Weight 430 Trailer Towing Guide oooooooooooooo o 430 Trailer Weight zie sederet tte ad 430 Transfer Case ur a ere d eR cie 494 Maintenance o 494 Transmission llle 357 Automaltie x24 ues ne BR Go Race RUN ee ee S 354 Maintenances oreca eieaa a Sb eRe d Yd 495 varii rig suas a cora ca a Ep 354 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 26 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 243 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 23 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 23 Tread Wear Indicators o o oooooo ooo oo 404 Tumognals s dr 286 Uniform Tire Quality Grades o o o o o o o 545 Universal Transmitter o o ooooooo ooo 243 Unleaded Gasoline ooooooooooooooo ooo 416 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 57 Vanity Mirrors ici ios a ey Res 127 en INDEX 563 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Loading x ode rem eee 392 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Vehicle Storage ico sans sdb eh E E ea 341 Viscosity Engine Qil ss seess resitet ee 474 Warning Flasher Hazard
186. e ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Acci dent Response System perform the following functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC if equipped air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals e However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by
187. e Center a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 525 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Q1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Change the engine oil and engine oil T Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear filter 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect T Rotate the tires rotate at the first the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet sustained high speed driving off road or frequent trailer towing sign of irregular wear 0 O O O D M A l N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center M A l N T E N A N ie E S ie H E D U L E S 8 526 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 2 Change the engine oil an
188. e Memory Feature 156 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory 158 Memory Position Recall 159 Easy Entry Exit Seat coooomo cm eee 160 ll TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 161 E LOGES acsi io dias a as 163 Headlight Switch o o o o 163 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 164 Headlights On Automatically With Wipers 164 Automatic High Beam If Equipped 165 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 166 Multifunction LeVer o o o 172 Automatic Headlight Leveling HID TurniSignals ce eee eek ees 173 Headlights Only oooooooooooooo 167 Lane Change Assist 0 e0000 173 a T ia ee 167 Flash To Pass ooooooooooo ooo ooo Headlight Delay see 167 Big bow Dean owe Parking Lights And Panel Lights 168 Ee EDD EERE ND A dn Fog Lights If Equipped isses 168 Windshield Wiper Operation 175 Interior Lights eese esee 169 A POPE eda E UE ficiis 18 Lights On Reminder ess 170 Windshield Washer Operation 176 Battery Saver sees 170 NUS Pm 177 Front Map Reading Lights 170 Bam Sensis Wipers Ti Rguippad os nites nds Courtesy Lights
189. e Spidning sesse riot un yr pani na 404 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 417 Tread Wear Indicators o ooooooooo 404 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 418 Lite OF TIE carta 405 MMT In Gasoline oooooooooooooo 418 Replacement Tires llle 406 Materials Added To Fuel 419 E TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 407 Fuel System Cautions se srana irse s rataa E TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 409 Carbon Monoxide Warnings Premium System If Equipped AU M ADDING FUEL s c2s 2 3bs eaeeeidadies Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 423 Warming S els une og ig as eR RE aa 412 E VEHICLE LOADING ssl 423 Soi EEE ah eons eee ate Certification Label ooooooooo o 423 See ale es E a lic B TRAILER TOWING 22 323 EE Rd 426 64LEngine eee 416 Common Towing Definitions 426 348 STARTING AND OPERATING In Trailer Hitch Classification 429 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings ooooooooooomoo 430 Trailer And Tongue Weight 430 Towing Requirements oooooooooo 431 Towing Tips ll RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC A STARTING AND OPERATING 349 STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transmission Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL o
190. e and loss of vehicle control Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may sion components You could lose control and have result in false speedometer and odometer readings a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire a el sizes with load ratings TIRE ROTA TON RECOMMENDATIONS approved for your vehicle The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at Never use a tire with a smaller load index or different loads and perform different steering handling capacity other than what was originally equipped and braking functions For these reasons they wear at on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load unequal rates index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with Continued 408 STARTING AND OPERATING aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction level
191. e child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103 5 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint you may have trouble tightening the seat belt If this happens disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt up to three full turns to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out away from the child restraint Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to complete the installation of the child restraint If the belt still cannot be tigh
192. e disengaged caus ing serious injury a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 459 In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the CAUTION transmission will not shift out of PARK such as a dead Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a battery a Manual Park Release is available vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release damage your vehicle 1 Open the center console and locate the Manual Park Release cover remove it by snapping the cover away MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED from the console hinges TRANSMISSION WARNING Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle 460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES J 0605001183 0605001179 Manual Park Release Cover Release Latch 2 Using a screwdriver or similar tool push the metal 3 While the metal latch is the open position simultane latch in towards the tether strap ously pull upwards on the tether strap until it clicks and releases out of the park position WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 461 To Disengage the
193. e engine air cleaner filter filter T Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary U Rotate the tires rotate at the first Q1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes sign of irregular wear 11 Drain the transfer case and refill 21 Inspect the accessory drive belt s replace if necessary 21 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary 11 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet sustained high speed driving off road or frequent trailer towing M A l N T E N A N ie E S Cc H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 529 M A 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or i Schedule 78 Months Maintenance T Q1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule E T Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear T Change the engine oil and engine oil N T If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect filter A the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Gi Rotate the tires rotate a
194. e excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher 800dfab8 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline A STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates s
195. e felt within two to five minutes 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl evel If the Hl level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes Front Heated Seats With Uconnect 8 4 8 4A If Equipped There are two heated seat soft keys that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located in the Uconnect system screen Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect display Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl level If the Hl level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after a
196. e from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Press and hold the lock button on the shift lever Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 457 NOTE Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph 8 km h or less Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 seconds you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine NOTE Press the ESC Off switch if necessary to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Elec tronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further information Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck v
197. e ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON Front Map Reading Lights The front map reading lights are mounted in the over head console 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either Courtesy Lights side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens To turn the lights off press the lens a second time 031464435 031433151 Courtesy Lights Front Map Reading Light Switches 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Ambient Light Multifunction Lever The overhead console is equipped with an ambientlight The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the feature This light casts i
198. e is started the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the BLD feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation 1 0512001493 ESC OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch Once the A STARTING AND OPERATING 381 situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momen tarily pressing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING e When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section has been disab
199. e rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 030407085 A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you NOTE The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing 030471112 The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned Automatic Dimming Mirror on or off using the Uconnect System refer to NOTE The mirror contains an Assist button and a 9 1 1 Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru button located on the bottom of the mirror ment Panel for further information a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Assist Call The rear view mirror cont
200. e the appropriate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants especially chil dren should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regul
201. e upper lid this feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Access User s Manual 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 4m 0451003527 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SXM CD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the b
202. e using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Continued WARNING Continued e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuri
203. ear the floor injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Adjustment Bar UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment WARNING Recline Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Recline Lever 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature If Heated Seats If Equipped Equipped On some models the front and rear seats may be To fold the seatback to the flat load floor position lift the equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and recline lever and push the seatback forward To return to seatbacks the seating position raise the seatback and lock it into WARNING place e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater
204. ease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display To decrease speed while the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 km h While the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 To Cancel The following conditions will cancel the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control without clearing the memory You softly tap or depress the brake pedal You press the CANCEL button The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates The vehicle parking brake is applied The braking temperature exceeds normal range overheated e The shift lever is removed from the Drive position To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at
205. ed the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams SmartBeam If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams softkey until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights Smart Beam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights If Equipped When this featu
206. ed Automatic Transmission Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art fuel efficient eight speed transmission The electronic shift lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional shifter Instead the shift lever is spring loaded and moves forward and rearward always returning to the center position after each gear is selected The transmission gear PRND is displayed both on the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To select a gear range press the lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward You must press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this sec tion To shift past multiple gear ranges at once such as PARK to DRIVE move the lever past the first or second detent Select the DRIVE range for normal driving The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between th
207. ed dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert amp BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and
208. ed oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPARQ engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenan
209. ed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 403 WARNING Continued replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of
210. ed surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 e e e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cle
211. ehicle CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Continued 458 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN CAUTION Continued Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans mission shifting occurring WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle The rear hook will be located on the driver s side of the vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle WARNING Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps may becom
212. ehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 541 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer wh
213. ehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis Front Turn Signal charge HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This dimin 1 Opon the hood ishes and becomes more white after approximately 2 Turn the turn signal bulb one quarter turn counter 10 seconds as the system charges clockwise to remove from housing Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the low or high beam bulb one quarter turn CAUTION counterclockwise to remove from housing Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the caution bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the CAUTION bulb with rubbing alcohol Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil Front Fog Lamps contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the 1 Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and bulb with rubbing alcohol disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connector 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN 2 Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze 4 Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back front fog lamp housing of the front fog
214. el only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage Cooling System Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
215. elvic bones but across your abdo men Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as your strongest bones will take the force in a colli sion e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi tor will withdraw any slack in the belt tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc
216. em the instrument cluster will dis play the PARKSENSE OFF message for ap proximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or requires service The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled If the ParkSense switch is pressed and the system requires service the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON Service The ParkSense Park Assist System When the ParkSense System is malfunctioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or the a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition with the front sensors the EVIC will display UNAVAILABLE at the front sensor location of the car graphic The system will continue to provide arc alerts at the rear sensor location When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition with the rear senso
217. engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 441 CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on
218. ent RKE 26 Belts Seat 4 2 c oce ode d cte doa Pes 52 Blind Spot Monitoring lees 128 Body Mechanism Lubricati0N 479 B Pillar Location 2 RI Rn 391 Brake Assist System llli eee 377 Brake Control System Electronic 375 Brake Fluid occur conil 491 Brake System cuo ga ees Rex eade a 491 Anti Lock ABS sees 376 Fluid Check 0 2234 see es 491 Master Cylinder sso ces ec Reese s 491 Parking 32 euet oca ni a estre e 373 Warning Light Brake Transmission Interlock 356 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 106 Bulb Replacement ooooooooooooooooo ooo 510 Bulbs Light ess ot Sauteed wing ethers ia 111 Camera Rear e ae Bin eRe dede Bs alee RE 238 Capacities Fluid iu eas dae Le REIR 517 Caps Filler Oil Engine ces ete ee ey Be d 474 Radiator Coolant Pressure 488 Carbon Monoxide Warning llle 108 Cargo Area COVEN ossigeno aea pa iE ee 273 Cargo Area Features 270 Cargo Compartment 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee 270 Lita corras eet gs 271 Cargo Light nico Lee eee es Le ees s 271 Cargo Tie DoWnS 4i aces eine acs ace RR Re On 274 Car Washes oas sw ra hne hey E RR ead 498 Cellular PHONG iiss eua doe enorm RR RR ro ae 332 550 INDEX In Center High Mounted Stop Light 516 Certification Label o o oo oooooo o 423 Chart Dre Sizing terso teresas d hme ER A 386 Check Engine Light
219. ents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you Changing the Active Braking status to Off prevents the system from providing limited autonomous braking or 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision NOTE The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key cycle to the next If the system is turned OFF it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted Changing FCW And Active Braking Status To change the FCW and Active Braking settings with Uconnect 8 4 8 4A System Screen if equipped NOTE The settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in PARK Follow these steps to set the FCW and Active Braking 1 Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect display 2 Press the Settings soft key 3 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 4 Press the FWD Collision Warning Far or Near soft key for your desired preference 5 Press the Active Braking On or Off soft key NOTE A check mark will appear in the selection box to indicate the setting To change the FCW and Active Braking settings with Uconnect 5 0 System Screen if equipped NOTE The settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in PARK Follow these steps to set the FCW and Active Braking 1 Press the MORE hard key located on t
220. er may reduce this range radios a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 How To Use Remote Start WARNING All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Doors closed Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in e Hood closed jury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e HAZARD switch off away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Battery at an acceptable charge level Information Center EVIC If Equipped RKE PANIC button not pressed The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely e e e Fuel meets minimum requirement Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar e System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Aborted System Fault e Remote Start Disabled Start Ve
221. er memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline A STARTING AND OPERATING 419 Materials Added To Fuel CAUTION Continued All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
222. er the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter clockwise and remove the jack and wheel blocks 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 110 ft lbs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 060633619 11 Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return Mounting Spare Tire it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam WARNING iay 12 Remove the small center cap and securely store the To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack road wheel in the cargo area do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 451 WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Road Tire Installation 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 060533364 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped Stowed Spare end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the 13 Have the aluminum road wheel and tire re
223. ered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibil ity to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always re quired while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
224. erstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the power liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 0213003436 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter Keyless Enter N Go Fob KIN 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated
225. es To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 MAX AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when MAX A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the MAX A C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A C indicator will turn off 2 AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the A C operation to switch into manual mode and the A C indicator will turn off 3 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 4 AUTO Operation Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 5 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 CAUTION Continued Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive 6 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button
226. es equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information e Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods e Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information e Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry Pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the
227. es if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and or Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IN and cause a collision that includes you This can happen WARNING far away from home or on your own street Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear Lap Shoulder Belts your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Research has shown that seat belt
228. es that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you 372 STARTING AND OPERATING HN POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY IF EQUI
229. ese gears The transmission shift lever provides PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL DRIVE and SPORT shift positions Once in the DRIVE range tapping the shift lever rearward will toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE mode You do not need to press the shift lever button when toggling between DRIVE and SPORT modes Manual shifts can be made using the shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel Pressing the shift paddles while in the 358 STARTING AND OPERATING DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the trans mission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster Refer to Paddle Shift Mode in this section for further information Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake A STARTING AND OPERATING 359 When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before WARNING Continued shifting the transmission to PARK As an added
230. etractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the table below and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle 022668725 ALR Anchor Locations THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a for ward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a for ward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restrain
231. ewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S a design standards The size designation for LT Metric 054903773 tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced Code TIN ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo Temperature Grades rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure 386 STARTING AND OPERATING HN compact spare tires have the letter I or 5 molded e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded ample T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or Tempor
232. expansion bottle overflow WARNING hoses are not kinked or obstructed Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter possible brake damage You would not have your full operation If replacement is ever necessary install braking capacity in an emergency ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced or immediately if the Brake System brake system warning light is on If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing cap With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN pads wear Br
233. ey until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscree
234. f a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions e full forward e full rearward and e normal Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped If equipped with power folding mirrors they can be electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive position The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L left and R right Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in press the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the normal driving position If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled a potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors back to the home position If the mirror does not electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can cause excessive drag UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Power Folding Mirror Switch Power Mirrors 030409528 uu m The power mirror switch is located on the driver s side i Power Mirror Switch door trim panel 1 Mirror Direction Control The power mirror controls consist of mi
235. fe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPARO parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate em than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe man ner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully 6 INTRODUCTION Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK 80bfe0t0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and cou
236. ff the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive battery post Pull upward on the cover to remove it 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455 Jump Starting Procedure 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive 4 post of the booster battery WARNING 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the Failure to follow this procedure could result in per negative post of the booster battery sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark 7 could cause the battery to explode and could result in NOTE Make sure at all times that unused ends of personal injury jumper cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while making connections 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
237. firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground A La AS Jack Warning Label 446 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from storage 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools RC Jack and Tool Assembly CAUTION Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on loca tions other than those indicated in the Jacking In structions for this vehicle 060641339 Jacking Locations For the front axle place the jack on the body flange just behind the front tire as indicated by t
238. fog lights are on 6 Selectable EVIC Information This area of the cluster will display selectable informa tion such as compass outside temperature etc For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC If Equipped of your owners manual for more information 7 Turn Signal Indicator The arrows will flash with the exterior turn sig nals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime and an EVIC message will appear if either turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile 1 6 km NOTE If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 8 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 9 Selectable EVIC Information This area of the cluster will display selectable informa tion such as compass outside temperature etc For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC If Equipped of your owners manual for more information 10 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LS The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 puc dC E ON RUN have the condition checked promptly WEENING Certain conditions poor fuel quality etc may illuminate A malfunctioning catalytic con
239. g Positions 58 DOES 5 era e eH Cb E des 34 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If B KEYLESS ENTER N GO 1 ecdede rege eines 35 Eguipped aas x oho sane ta edo ened ured 59 B WINDOMS sce s too cem o X Rel 40 Energy Management Feature 60 Power Windows 2 0 0 eee eee eee 40 Seat Belt Pretensioners 60 Wind Buffeting 52st be RE Re aod 44 Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR 60 B LIFIGATE ge Rem a 44 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Power Liftgate If Equipped 45 BeltAlertB 2 2 mem eed 64 Seat Belt Lock Out 65 a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Child Restraints vus ud ias a 82 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 65 M ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 106 Seat Belt Extender sls 66 BM SAFETY TIPS vous soccer 107 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Transporting Passengers o o oooooo o 107 aS a dtt eon hte Ree ee ig te Ur EPEE T EE 108 Advanced Front Air Bag Features 69 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 73 Vehicle ier ot eem nk ex xe 109 Event Data Recorder EDR 81 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicles serras ibe ae di 111 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM A WORD ABOUT YOU
240. g is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines NOTE Fill engine oil one quart at a time CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Continued CAUTION Continued Operating the engine with the oil levels below the safe zone or operating with oil levels that exceed the top of the safe zone may cause engine damage Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API categories of SM or SM CF The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic SAE 0W 40 engine oil or equivalent CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has
241. g retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate CINCH If Equipped 8 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 1 2 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Next pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of th
242. gate Open the flipper glass Pull up glass seal at bottom of window opening Remove small trim panel around liftgate glass striker Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate Disconnect the two trim panel lights 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 10 Ti 12 13 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL The center high mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement 073310731 Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps Tail lamps are now visible Rotate socket s counter clockwise 073310730 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Remove replace bulb s Rear License Lamp Reinstall the socket s i 1 The rear license lamps are LED Service at Authorized Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim Dealer a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 25 Gallons 94 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 6 4 Liter Engine SAE 0W 40 Synthetic API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 6 4 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 16 Quarts 15 5 Liters 150 000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of Chrysler Ma terial Standard MS 12106 ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE aan NNNM FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolan
243. gear and the vehicle is in WARNING Bion When working near the radiator cooling fan e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition vehicle switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires switch is in the ON position disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 only by an authorized dealer Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness
244. h plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes Continued ty seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized O ry dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See y
245. has not applied sufficient brake force the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required BRAKE 0323001258 FCW Message When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph 10 km h The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Turning FCW ON Or OFF NOTE The default status of FCW is On this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you The forward collision button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display To turn the FCW system OFF press the forward collision button once to turn the system OFF led turns on To turn the FCW system back ON press the forward collision button again to turn the system ON led turns off Changing the FCW status to Off prev
246. have moved fully into the lane There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead RA AL 032400174 Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 General Information FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems Classification Specifications 47 C ER Part 15 47 C E R Part 15 515 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accel erator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 30 km h To change between the different cruise control modes press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC ON OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL Fixed Speed CONTROL OFF Pressing of the NORMAL Fixed Speed CRUISE CONTROL ON OFF button will result in turning ON changing to the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode WARNING In the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles
247. he e ee eae 300 EVIC Amber Telltales 302 Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings 315 E Uconnect RADIOS IF EQUIPPED 329 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN E iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 329 M CLIMATE CONTROLS 4 332 ll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF General Overview 000000e eae 333 BURR rr undue des pa Climate Control Functions 338 Rado OPRAO tab cS uq esas ae Automatic Temperature Control ATC 340 CD Player cc ctecee eva e RET ROS 331 Operating Tips deccrorraperas irte 341 E CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 331 ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040174242 1 Air Outlet 6 Lower Switch Bank 11 Hood Release 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Hazard Switch 12 Fuel Door Release 3 Radio 8 Storage Bin SD Card AUX USB Me 13 Headlight Switch dia Hub 4 Glove Compartment 9 ESC Button 14 Dimmer Control 5 Climate Controls 10 Ignition Switch 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 0403001209 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to the
248. he ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position rain sensing wiper operation can resume if it has been selected and no other inhibit conditions mentioned previously exist 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column push the lever downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering whee
249. he lower right side of the Uconnect system 2 Press the Settings soft key 3 Press the Safety Assistance soft key 4 Press the first FWD Collision W soft key a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 5 Press the FWD Collision Warning Far or Near soft key for your desired preference Then press the back arrow 6 Press the second FWD Collision W soft key 7 Press the Active Braking On or Off soft key The default status of FCW is the Far setting and the Active Braking is the On setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away and it applies limited braking This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience NOTE e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncoming traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC with the unavailable screens FCW Limited W
250. he triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 447 060637589 mm 448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 060641341 060637590 Front Jacking Location Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding 5 For a rear tire place the jack in the slot on the rear tie down bracket just forward of the rear tire as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 449 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 7 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 8 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the 060641477 wheel Lightly tighten the nuts mm CAUTION Rear Jacking Location 6 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum sta spare tire is mounted incorrectly bility 450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 9 Low
251. heel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects Continued WARNING Continued or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition En gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match A STARTING AND OPERATING 379 the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel positio
252. heels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault is detected possibly related to the trigger compo nent an incorrect sensor location fault In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 correct vehicle position However the system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message exists NOTE There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pre
253. hicle to Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash vehicle doors will lock and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes NOTE If your power door locks were unlocked Remote Start will automatically lock the doors If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Dr
254. his could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to A STARTING AND OPERATING 427 measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weig
255. ht Switch To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight O switch clockwise When the headlight switch is on the parking lights taillights license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position WM 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore differ ent lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the A AUTO position When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be run
256. ht delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The headlight delay time is programmable in the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Program mable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Parking Lights And Panel Lights DO To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights rotate the headlight switch clockwise To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control 031409584 Fog Light Operation The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selecte
257. ht of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be more than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer 428 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by appl
258. icle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS minus minus Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 lbs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 395 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 396 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION j y shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems
259. icle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE e If the windshield or automatic high beam mirror is replaced the automatic high beam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions sticker toll box etc on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM To Activate 1 Enable the Automatic High Beams through the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Pro grammable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings jn Understanding Your Instrument Panel for fur ther information 2 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you or rearward in car to manually deactivate the system normal operation of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights low inten
260. ifferent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be flushed with NR MEE OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant anti Continued freeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN the same engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
261. ight rating for the trailer hitch 5 utilized e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels Towing R i ts Trailer Brakes e GCWR must not be exceeded THUMB cod MUCH SCR Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or Continued vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury 434 STARTING AND OPERATING HN An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 1 653 lbs 750 kg accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident CAUTION
262. il filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear T Replace the engine air cleaner filter 11 Inspect and replace PCV valve if nec essary 11 Drain the transfer case and refill I Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 531 M A 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance T T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule E T Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear T Change the engine oil and engine oil N T If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect filter A the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Rotate the tires rotate at the first N J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary sign of irregular wear E J Inspect the CV joints T Inspect the front and rear axle fluid 1 Inspect exhaust system change if using your vehicle for po S 21 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all lice taxi fleet sustained high speed Cc parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary driving off
263. ill automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached If however Paddle Shift is engaged while in SPORT or TRACK mode the transmission will remain in the selected gear even when maximum engine speed is reached The transmission will upshift only when commanded by the driver The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated You can start out from a stop in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed Holding the paddle depressed will progressively downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Paddle Shift mode is enabled The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected 366 STARTING AND OPERATING To disengage Paddle Shift mode press and hold the shift paddle until D or S is once again displayed in the instrument cluster You can shift in or
264. ill then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Program mable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Illuminated Vanity Mirrors To access an illuminated vanity mirror flip down one of the visors 030409524 Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn on automatically Illuminated Vanity Mirror 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle
265. ill chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Programming Addit
266. ill show separate distances for each zone zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm E Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30 cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to CAUTION To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob drive path structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and Continued must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Continued e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView amp On Or Off With Uconnect 5 0 1 Turn the Radio on 2 Press the
267. ilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support 030909539 Power Lumbar Switch 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Manual Front Seats Forward Rearward While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located under Adjustment the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious Some models may be equipped with manual front driver or passenger seats The seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion n
268. ime to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC will display ON RUN e e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC will display OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 353 WARNING Continued ee SC neues ENGINE Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter 1 Press and hold the brake pedal If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel and vehicle e If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster 2 Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster hold it ON battery or the battery in another vehicle This type
269. in selecting the Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 430 STARTING AND OPERATING IE Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings Engine o Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Trailer Tongue Transmission Trailer Wt Wt See Note Rating 6 4L Automatic 12 600 Ibs 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 7 200 lbs 3 265 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg 5 715 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE Trailer And Tongue Weight The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information e Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend using the run flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or towing a trailer Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 1076 to 1576 of the GTW
270. including cornering accelera tion and braking There are 3 modes 1 Bring vehicle to complete stop on a level track surface with the engine running e Touring Mode Available in terrain positions AUTO and SNOW Used during highway speeds where a touring suspension feel is desired 2 Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving 3 Firm Mode Available in terrain positions SPORT and 4 Press and release the LAUNCH Button 5 Fully press the brake pedal e TOW Provides a firm suspension for better handling Full Firm Available in TRACK mode Provides a full firm suspension for an aggressive track experience Press the accelerator pedal to the floor NOTE If the cluster launch EVIC message indicates all conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is pressed to the floor quickly within approximately 1 2 second the system will hold the engine speed to a preset speed below the engine rev limiter speed e 6 Release the brake pedal A STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Pressing the launch control button when launch control is active will deactivate launch control NOTE e e Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum RPM and waits for the driver to release the brake Launch Mode then uses engine throttle only to achieve controlled wheelslip for maximum acceleration through first gear Launch Mode can be initiated in any of the Select Trac Modes Launch Mode is not available unti
271. ion of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos sible e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer controls are located on the mul tifunction lever on the left side of the steering column The rear wiper washer is operated by rotating a switch located at the middle of the lever 036463509 Rear Wiper Washer Control A Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation Rotating the center portion upward once more will activate the washer pump which will con tinue to operate as long as the switch is hel
272. ional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply Batteries could contain dangerous materials Please dispose of them according to respect for environment and local laws Used batteries are harmful to the environment You can dispose of them either in the correct containers as specified by law or by taking them to a Dealership which will deal with their disposal Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Separating RKE Transmitter Case 021337430 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid
273. is also muted e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used belts In a collision people riding in these areas are SEATS more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the using a seat belt properly vehicle WARNING Some models may be equipped with eight way power e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or driver and front passenger seats The power seat switches outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in are located on the outboard side of the seat There are two these areas are more likely to be seriously i
274. is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense amp Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC or from the Uconnect Sys tem if available Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features or Uconnect Settings if available in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVI
275. is reached WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Passenger s Power Seat Some models are equipped with a six way power pas senger seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat The switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cushion Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached T
276. is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 421 Fuel Filler Door Release Switch Fuel Filler Door 2 Open the fuel filler door 3 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system 4 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling 422 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches e Remove funnel from filler pipe clean off prior to allowing the flapper door to open putting back in the spare tire storage area ids of shuto off the fueltenk full CAUFION clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full AO 6 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling Emergency Gas Can Refueling Most gas cans will not open the flapper door WARNING e A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the emergency refueling with a gas can vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area being filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel in violation of most state and
277. istance Greater than 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than 12 in in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 30 cm Front Distance Greater than 47 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than 12 in in cm 47 in 120 cm 120 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow for rear Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone only for rear only Arcs None Ath Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes NOTE ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone Front Park Assist Audible Alerts ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert chime after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle has been detected the vehicle is stationary and brake pedal is applied 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect System if equipped If Uconnect System is equipped chime volume settings will not be accessible from the EVIC The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles Enabling And Disabling ParkSense amp ParkSense amp can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch Pya When the ParkSense switch is pressed to dis orr able the syst
278. ive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button e Remote Start Active Push Start Button will dis play in the EVIC until you press the start button Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Uconnect System For more information on Remote Start Comfort System operation refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE DOOR LOCKS The power door locks can be manually locked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downwar
279. iver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or 1 This device may not cause harmful interference mmm gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door gt opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without NOTE these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas The term IC before the certification registration num can cause serious injury or death ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the device 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors onthe overhead console e Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not leave the key in the ignition switch or lea
280. juries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owne
281. jury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limi tations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE If ParkSense is enabled at one of these shift lever positions the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view
282. kup F36 30 Amp Rear Defroster Yellow Lights If Pink a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F37 30 Amp Rear Blower If F46 10 Amp Tire Pressure Pink Equipped Red Monitor F38 30 Amp Power Inverter F49 10 Amp Integrated Central Pink 115V AC If Red Stack Climate Equipped Control F39 30 Amp Power Liftgate If F50 20 Amp Air Suspension Pink Equipped Yellow Control Module If F40 10 Amp Daytime Running Equipped Red Lights F51 10 Amp Ignition Node F42 20 Amp Horn Red Module Keyless Yellow Ignition Steering Fad 10 Amp Diagnostic Port pour Red F52 5 Amp Battery Sensor Tan 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Yellow Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F53 20 Amp Trailer Tow Left F63 20 Amp Ignition Coils Yellow Turn Stop Lights Yellow Gas Urea Heater If Equipped Diesel F56 15 Amp Additional Content F64 25 Amp Fuel Injectors Blue Diesel engine only Natural Powertrain F57 15 Amp Transmission F66 10 Amp Sunroof Passen Blue Red ger Window F59 10 Amp Purging Pump Switches Rain Red Diesel engine only Sensor F60 15 Amp Transmission Con F67 15 Amp CD DVD Blue trol Module Blue Bluetooth Hands F62 10 Amp Air Conditioning free
283. l outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 NN POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for further information WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving
284. l remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Opening Power Shade Express Press the shade switch rearward and release it within one half second and the shade will open automatically from any position The shade will open and stop auto matically at the half open position Press the shade switch rearward again and release it within one half second and the shade will open automatically to the full open position This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the shade switch will stop the shade Opening Power Shade Manual Mode To open the shade press and hold the switch rearward The shade will open and stop automatically at the half open position Press and hold the shade switch rearward again and the shade will open
285. l that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 al UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining bu
286. l the 500 mile break in has been achieved DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle CAUTION Due to lower ground clearance driving your ve hicle up steep driveways approach ramps or near parking blocks may cause damage to the front fascia and ground effects Driving through snow more than 4 inches 100 mm deep may cause damage to the front fascia and ground effects 370 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING e Always check the depth of the standing water Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this waming may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave
287. lamp housing 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in 5 Insertthe bulb into the housing until the index tabs are the housing engaged in the slots of the collar 6 Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp CAUTION housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are e Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil fully engaged contamination will severely shorten bulb life If 7 j Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface connector clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol e Always use the correct bulb size and type for Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamps replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp the socket or the lamp wiring 2 Remove the two push pins from the tail lamp housing 1 Raise the liftgate 3 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel 073310728 4 Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from lamp 5 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 6 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the lamp assembly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 1 No AN O Oi mH C Continue removing the trim Raise the liftgate Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the lower trim from the liftgate Once lower trim is loose close the lift
288. ld damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire 5 Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module 412 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components
289. ld have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for mainte nance and repairs will not be covered by the manufac turer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAUTION Continued The pages that follow contain the required maintenance Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids services determined by the engineers who designed your that protect the performance and d
290. ld reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 7 4 10 loba i E ED e E I ELECTRONIC STABILITY ii E p E i i i i du E A O T i amp i i x s Di i i f 3 i i E A Dp iw ES Ne O t 8 2 i f i 1910 cS H D ie lala la im TI i i E E i i i i i i i i i HEATED i q EI Ju IS de 19 t jor Es gt TEM ique B ub E i i g i i i 3 i JE i 3 H g i E 3 3 H i i p ied O o T ein E a Ed i i El 3 i E 8 i 3 eLecraome CONTROL OFF 010533317 8 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against oper ating procedures that could res
291. ld restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022668566 Lower Anchor Top Tether Locations V Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Di Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Child Restraint LATCH Positions What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the LATCH an chorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
292. le and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result Continued a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 WARNING Continued Do not connect the cable to the negative post of WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should Warranty Information Book located on the DVD be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the for further warranty information start of each warm season This service should include The air conditioning system contains refrigerant cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test under hisk pressure Io avoid wale uf nersonal Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time ES 8 p pe injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant CAUTION or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Do not use chemical flushes in your air c
293. led and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Partial Off mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys tem is reduced e Trailer Sway control TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode Full Off This mode is available in TRACK mode only Refer to Selec Terrain in Starting And Operating for further information In this mode all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF To enter the Full Off mode press and hold the ESC Off switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds a chime will sound the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESC OFF message will display in the vehicle odometer Press and release the TRIP ODOMETER but ton located on the instrument cluster to clear this mes sage The ESC OFF message may appear in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion To turn ESC ON again momentarily press the ESC Off switch 382 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved into the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will o
294. ll doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver s front door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry
295. ll open position for rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim near the liftgate opening to operate If the liftgate is not fully open press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the liftgate and then press it again to close If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is opening the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear the liftgate will continue to power close However vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder
296. ll unlock when you press the button on the liftgate For further informa tion refer to Uconnect amp in Understanding Your In strument Panel a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 To Lock The Vehicle s Doors Do NOT grab the door handle when pressing the door handle lock button This could unlock the door s With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handle press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and liftgate 020273033 Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This Press The Door Handle Button To Lock 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door and rear doors which operate the front passenger and rear passenger door windows The win dow controls will opera
297. llumination for improved visibil steering column ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area 031563090 022329449 Multifunction Lever Ambient Light a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the
298. loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 283 EVIC Red Telltales 303 ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 284 EVIC Green Telltales ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 285 EVIC Selectable Menu Items ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items 312 Ee dun dodenus tlie d ll Uconnect ACCESS SETTINGS 315 rum ibn MU de r Hard Keys ien 315 Engine Oil Change Indicator System 299 SPORES adi ari ciini degunt d am Customer Programmable Features Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Messages ido hd ac
299. looded Starting isses 352 Fuel Requirements sse n Re 416 Jump Starting Oil oss Tata ERU S HE et Rr e wigs d Spr d 552 INDEX IN Oil Change Interval im mee 472 OU Piller Caps x ice dete muore e nerd 474 Oil Selection 22299 6 RR REPRE Red 473 Oil Synthetic zia ees eer sa cats weed 474 Overheating seren cae ee 440 LATINOS eesse Re ee ea RR CR Pr 349 Temperature Gauge llle 288 Engine Oil Viscosity ooooooooommooo o 474 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 77 Entry System Illuminated oo ooo oooo o 22 Ethanol vous es bebe tam eee eee 417 Event Data Recorder 0000004 81 Exhaust Gas Caution 0000004 48 Exhaust System sese a 108 Exterior Lights cosmos e has baa 111 Filters Air Cleaner eiei eea oa ee tate a e a 475 Air Conditioning Engine Oll se se se ii OE eaa e o 474 Engine Oil Disposal uote gora 474 Flas hets 528 pedi d a hae P ia a 440 Hazard Warning sse e mme 440 T rn Signal so cades E n nne b ed tes 111 Flooded Engine Starting o o ooooooooo oo 352 Fluid Capacities pesee misg e 9 diia Een 517 Eluid L aks uote bx 111 Fluid Level Checks Brake usos ro ara 491 Cooling Syste sae cag nenia e een e 485 Engine Dilo x oe d ges Se css aba i 471 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 518 Fog Lights sisse ee e e 286 Fog Light Service i22 s Rr Rees 513 Folding Rear Seat ooocomoocoor r oso 153 Forward
300. low petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Front Axle Fluid Level Check The front axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs 30 to 40 N m CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage them and cause them to leak Rear Axle Fluid Level Check The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs 30 to 40 N m on axles with aluminum housings The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs 30 to 70 N m on axles with cast iron housings 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only the
301. lt Reminder llle 285 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 293 SOLVE aora tears aay eee Or RAE ERN Era es 512 556 INDEX IN Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 286 Side Marker x uisa ot ee rd s 514 5martBeams iuo odd ed RE RAPERE ERE 165 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 290 Traction Control 0 0 0 0 0 00020000 383 T rn Signal ue in age dewey Gee Geel Baa 111 Vanity Mirror i sisse e e ehe s 127 Loading Vehicle s estss ree RA E 423 DROS ara ee GU eR ed om ache ete Us 391 LOCKS A ER RI AS ah wae EP 32 Child Protecti cese kr Ee RR Ra 34 DOoOf isswdnew e e b Y DE ERE E PER 32 Power DO exces vale ae ei eas 33 Lubrication Body 6 6 6 eee 479 Maintenance Free Battery o o 475 Maintenance Procedures seredan cenre nnes 471 Maintenance S h dule ni ress resse eeri 522 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 286 Manual S rvic 4a cia eE idee es 544 Memory Feature Memory Seat 156 Memory Seat iae reventada Py e Rs 156 Memory Seats and Radi0 156 Methanol ico keen eae ee alee ah ud 417 IMIE OES cy dues cR poate don a a 121 Electric Powered llle 125 Electric Remote 0 00 cee eee 125 Exterior Folding 4 vsus eben bE te oe ES 124 Heated 5 osc ka kk e PRG Or er 126 Outside uds rug deegser Ry ache 69k Rd ges 123 Rearview leere 121 Vanity seus queue hee eR ERR G
302. m going all the way up during the NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto Up If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing a Auto Up Window Switches a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Resetting The Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Button The Window Lockout button on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the rear doors To disable the window controls on
303. manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Transfer Case Fluid Level Check For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should be inspected If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Adding Fluid Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First remove fill plug then remove drain plug Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When installing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid specifications It is important to maintai
304. mize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 3 y 022607497 022607757 1 Downward Movement 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 2 Rearward Movement 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II 022607494 AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authoriz
305. mpact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the SABIC The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABIC inflates This especially applies to children The SABIC is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags and driver passenger knee air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event th
306. must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc 030409806 Sensor Location Driver Side Shown The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information Warning Light Location a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle Side Monitoring 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IE Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative less than 15 mph 24 km h and the vehicle remains in speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed bet
307. n Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent col lisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro priate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent collisions The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 380 STARTING AND OPERATING The ESC system has three available operating modes On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicl
308. n retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into position NOTE To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front and rear crossbars approxi mately 24 in 61 cm apart Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft using increments of 1 in 2 5 cm a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 e e If the rear crossbar or any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception For improved satellite radio reception avoid placing the rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna The grab handles on the back of the vehicle if equipped are not to be used as a towing feature CAUTION To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle do not carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars installed The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface Continued CAUTION Continued To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ib 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri ately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or
309. n warning On Off button will stay illuminated Once the vehicles ignition has been cycled the system will re set and resume to full functionality To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly reverse the process above The fastener torque required to assembly the bracket back to the beam is 6 6 ft Ibs 9 N m a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Service ACC FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required or Cruise FCW Unavailable Service Required there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Towing A Trailer NOTE Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel or a vehicle merging in from a side lane There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate
310. n you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experi ence To change the FCW status touch and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display To change the Park Assist status touch and release the Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and oper ating information 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft k
311. n cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation g The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off STARTING AND OPERATING 385 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE Tire Markings e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sid
312. n display along with a a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is select
313. n object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re straint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Head Restraints Rear Seats The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust able They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their normal position when the rear seat is raised After Rear Head Restraint returning either seat to its upright position raise the head restraint until it locks in place The outboard headrests are not removable 030933142 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 NOTE Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and 1 WARNING positioned forward This will allow the rear seatback to Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered fold down easily position could resul Hee nous injury Or death iia oos opo upward on the release lever to release the seat collision Always make sure the outboard head re straints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied NOTE For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 60 40 Split Rear Seat To Lower Rear Seat
314. n the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid NOTE No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter Continued CAUTION Continued shudder Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid speci fications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your
315. n while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 9 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 10 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either hard keys or soft keys as follows Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft key Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 11 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individu ally adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets
316. nce the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR 414 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 1 5 MPH Tire Low Inflate to 270 kPa Press b to Hide ooooo VEHICLE INFO Tire Presure 0550001492 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the w
317. nce your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first A MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 523 Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by refer ring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop For Fuel Check the engine oil level Refer to Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once A Month Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and power steering and add as needed Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change Change the engine oil filter Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items m
318. nded Type of Child Restraint Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve hicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle of their booster seat Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant
319. ne air cleaner filter replace if necessary 11 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the CV joints 11 Inspect exhaust system 11 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a D ood D Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear Replace the engine air cleaner filter Drain the transfer case and refill Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Flush and replace the engine coolant at 150 000 miles 250 000 km or 120 months whichever comes first Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 536 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a componen
320. nflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 mil liseconds Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the i
321. ng around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system WARNING or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things into the passenger compartment In addition have the To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised information for lubrication or oil change Replace as required A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fu
322. ng the vehicle always remove the key This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never does not show the degree of brake application leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever e When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 WARNING Continued CAUTION Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged MANDA f before driving failure to do so can lead to b
323. nician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter of your owners manual for more information 17 Selectable EVIC Menu This area of the cluster will display the EVIC selectable menu For further information refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped of your owners manual for more information 18 Air Bag Warning Light o This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an autho rized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle of your owners manual for further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 19 Vehicle Security Light This light
324. ning before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on The programmable settings are a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 available in the in the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Ac cess 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automati cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers And Washers in this section for further information NOTE When your headlights come on during the day time the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity Refer to Lights in this section for further information Automatic High Beam If Equipped The automatic high beam system provides increased for ward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects veh
325. njured switches that control the movement of the seat cushion or killed and the seatback Power Seats If Equipped Continued 030909538 Power Seat Switches 1 Seatback Switch 2 Seat Switch Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position
326. o has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 542 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please
327. ocated to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mn WARNING e Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not leave the key in the ignition switch or leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON Run position Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrap ment may result in serious injury or death Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second The sunroof and sunshade will open automati cally from any position The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade wil
328. omatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 522 Required Maintenance Intervals M A l N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N Cc E S ie H E B U L E S 8 522 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months si
329. on refer to Uconnect in Understanding Your Instrument Panel In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the lift gate trim panel If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away aa oy NOTE e The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 22 F 30 C or temperatures above 150 F 65 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 The power liftgate must be in the fu
330. on while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 4 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas senger temperature hard or soft control buttons 7 8 13 14 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect System Settings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air di
331. onditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning the glove box Perform the following procedure to re service be performed by authorized dealer or other place the filter service facilities using reco an lin ipment Bice teiclli ies using recovery dnd recycling equipsent 1 Open the glove compartment and remove all contents NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 2 Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door 3 Pivot the glove compartment downward 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result A C Air Filter Replacement 5 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing MAINTAINING
332. ontaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Washing e e e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPARO Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and paint
333. onth Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judge ment when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage 398 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this
334. ooooommoooo ooo 218 Rear Seat Folding 2 eee 153 Rear Window Features lle 276 Rear Wiper Washer sse 276 Reclining Front Seats si sus sir dana iia ame auaa 143 Recorder Event Data llle 81 Recreational Towing 0 0 0 0 002 ee eee 437 Reformulated Gasoline 000 416 Refrigerant s ci bone ape khe c an od 477 Reminder Seat Belt o o ooooo ooo 64 ne INDEX 559 Remote Control Starting System iius a baee a RR aan ae ayaa ES 28 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 23 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 330 Remote Starting System o oo oooooooo ooo 28 Replacement Bulbs o o o o o o 0000004 510 Replacement Keys sss una 356042444 90004 18 Replacement Parts ooooooooomomoooo oo 470 Replacement Tires 000000000004 406 Reporting Safety Defects o o 543 Restraints Child cee eee ae 82 Restraints Occupant 00 00 0004 48 Retractable Cargo Area Cover o o 273 Roll Over Warning llle 5 Rotation TITLES is asks XE anes SS 407 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 109 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 111 Safety Defects Reporting oooooooooo o 543 Safety Exhaust Gas 6 044404 e m ae HE an 48 Safety Information Tires ssaa eeke aek am 385 Safety TIPS edestasid a ais samiot p gi RE s 107 Schedule Maintenance
335. ooooooooooooo o 180 Tire and Loading Information Placard 391 Tire Markingss 4a boe races Sota 385 A ded t inia E bod o dr ed IR 111 Aging Life Of Tires exem se ee 405 Air Pressure o o 396 Compact Spare 04 0644 eu ba Er ned 402 General Information llle 396 High Speed vitara Gs Gare sai wae Pee stein 398 Inflation Pressures 0 0 0 0 cee eee 397 Life of THf S 05 4 044288 24 RE GE PS ER ad 405 Load Capacity 325a cuota Pb ees 391 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 409 Pressure Warning Light 290 Quality Grading 2 oc ee ee eee esa tisis 545 Radial iussa cuam baw ev ae a OA ER Pe des 399 Replacement sc sare o ene Hts gaa ud 406 Rotation 2343 dike ears dhe Haha Aue GOES 407 Daley uus sis adco ada s ese HO CES od e Re de nee 385 SIZES 2 xcaggueg nx cea Ae Ra ea LAURG S UP s 386 SHOW Ties us deos e LUCR CR DR dO CRGO e dod 400 Spare Tife sse sus ke d eR e oes e ep ei d 443 SPINNING oeras drst dre OR acne ed re ede Roe d 404 562 INDEX ee Tread Wear Indicators o oooooooo o 404 Tire Safety Information res enea sera iak Eaa 385 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 430 Tow Hooks Emergency seses eataa a ae ai 458 TOWING aora i aa E da 426 Behind a MotorhoMe sss a sasatoanana 437 Guide eins bp RS Re E aa pe gel od 430 Recreational 0 0 0 0 0c eee 437 Weight ii peces deve ERRARE Rud 430 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhom
336. or lock knob to the unlocked position roll down the window and open the door using the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time If you unlock the doors using the passive entry door handles but do NOT pull the door handle the doors will automatically lock after 60 seconds To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the driver s front door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed a
337. ossible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen An example of this message type is Automatic High Beams On
338. ot a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment e Ifthe sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Do ing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE e If the ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor message occurs frequently e g more than once on every trip without any snow rain mud or other obstruction have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer Installing a snow plow front end protector an after market grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sen
339. ottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good dis
340. ou unplugged the garage door opener device for while you press and release cycle your hand held programming plug it back in at this time transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained fully trained follow these steps 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position rates When it changes it is programmed It may take 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until upto 30 segonds or longer u rare cases The garage the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do door may open and close while you are programming not release the button Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button With leasing th ith i and observe the indicator light 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all e If the indicator light stays on constantly program remaining steps ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Using HomeLink amp To operate press and release the programmed
341. our authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways 110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfer ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued WARNING Continued Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required moun
342. out of the Paddle Shift mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury SELEC TRAC IF EQUIPPED Description Selec Trac combines the capabilities of the vehicle con trol systems along with driver input to provide the best performance for all terrains 0518001494 Selec Trac Switch Selec Trac consists of the following positions e Sport Dry weather on road calibration Performance based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but with improved handling and acceleration over a two wheel drive vehicle The customer has the option of going to partial ESC The active suspension system will be in Semi Firm mode and a green flag will light up in the instrument cluster The transmission will provide a more aggressive shifting pattern Refer to Paddle Shift Mode in Starting And Operating for further information This feature will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle Snow Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces such as snow When in Snow mode depending on certain operating conditions the transmission may use second gear rather than first gear during launches to minimize wheel slippage Auto Fully automatic full time fo
343. owing heavy trailers select TOW mode refer to Selec Trac in Starting and Operating or use the Paddle Shift shift control refer to Paddle Shift Mode in this section to select a lower gear Under these condi tions using TOW mode or a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup During extremely cold temperatures 22 F 30 C or below transmission operation may be modified depend ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level SPORT This mode alters the transmission s automatic shift schedule for sportier driving Upshift speeds are in creased to make full use of available engine power To switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes tap the shift lever rearward SPORT mode is only accessible from DRIVE Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission may A STARTING AND OPERATING 363 operate only in certain gears or may not shift at all Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall In some situations the transmission may not re engage if the engine is turned off and restarted The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL ma
344. paired as Ing outs soon as possible properly secure the spare tire with the special wing nut torqued to 3 7 ft lbs 5 N m reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray and latch the rear load floor cover 452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack handle counterclockwise follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the Precautions wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft lbs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the bat
345. pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Start Keyless Enter N Go FOBIK is in the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button 1 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL 2 Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once 3 The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds A STARTING AND OPERATING 351 4 If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition
346. pped 126 mm Inside Day Night Mirror 121 Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With Memory Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 121 Seat BGPP Cd seen gener trey me Outside Mirrors 00000 123 HIGGUHAROd Vanity MEMOS perrea ponete al Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 124 NOU cM MINE i MEME 128 E M M CUN PEN 104 ME BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED 128 n Power rete TRE oe wisn te dedi 125 Rear Cross Path cese ai oeae a 135 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Modes Of Operation 06 136 Equipped isses DOM SEATS o on 138 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MH Power Seats If Equipped 138 Passenger s Power Seat 140 Power Lumbar If Equipped 141 Manual Front Seats Forward Rearward Adjustment 0 0 0 e eee 142 Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment Recline setae RUE keke Rec Ress 143 Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature If Equipped as eer e HERR 144 Heated Seats If Equipped 144 Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect 8 4 8 4A If Equipped Head Restraints o 149 60 40 Split Rear Seat Reclining Rear Seat o o oooo o o ooo 155 E DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED 156 Programming Th
347. product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air They are not permanent and normally heal quickly bags will not be in place to protect you a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 WARNING Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system 2 could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket si
348. programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation
349. r A E oe amen ae protect passengers from loose cargo To cover the cargo area 1 Grasp the cover at the center handle Pull it over the cargo area 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover 3 The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in place Rear Cargo Cover 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING In a collision a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store it in the vehicle Rear Cargo Tie Downs The rear cargo tie downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving Rear Cargo Tie Downs a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 WARNING e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or accident a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and posit
350. r PARK inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat before shifting into any driving gear belts CAUTION WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Enter N Go ACC or RUN position A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 350 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
351. r a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered Power outlets labeled with a key are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position while the outlets labeled with a battery are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times NOTE All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge To ensure proper cigar lighter operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel Push inward on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain access to this power outlet 034773369 Front Power Outlet In addition to the front power outlet there is also a power outlet located in the storage area of the center console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 034773368 Center Console Outlet Rear Power Outlet The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo area 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The rear power outle
352. r exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle 394 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your veh
353. r s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear height or weight limits of their child seat of the vehicle restraint 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Child Size Height Weight or Age Recomme
354. rake Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic ram failure and a collision brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in and Electronic Stability Control ESC All five of these PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll Systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and and cause damage or injury control in various driving conditions parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Also your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control TSC 376 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive
355. rated You may also UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e BalancelFade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Paired Devices This featu
356. rator to recharge the vehicle s battery 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current This outlet can power cellular phones electron ics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Play station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools Power Inverter The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset To avoid overloading a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices CUPHOLDERS prior to using the inverter There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers WARNING located in the center console To avoid serious injury or death Do not insert any objects into the receptacles e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Front Cupholders 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE located in the fold down center armrest
357. rature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 548 INDEX IN Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 188 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 487 Adding Fuel 2 22 e DR Reb ead 420 Additives Fuel o ooo o 419 AMD ld es ede 66 Airbag Deployment sbe ssnssi aasre ordinea as 78 Airbag Light se gesci 330486405054 eh nite 74 Airbag Maintenance llle 79 Airbag Side 903 0 Mean as Cie 70 Airbag Window Side Curtain 70 Air Cleaner Engine Engine
358. re infor mation Spare Tires CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result 402 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is design
359. re is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the door locks are activated To make your selection
360. re shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Access User s Manual SiriusXM Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U S residents only Uconnect amp RADIOS IF EQUIPPED For detailed information about your Uconnect radio refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Located inside the center consol
361. refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 543 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause
362. restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 4 For the center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat 5 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram 0226001465 Top Tether Strap Mounting 6 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IS WARNING The top tether anchorages are not visible until the gap panel is folded down Do not use the visible cargo tie down hooks located on the floor behind the seats to attach a child restraint tether anchor Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage Center Seating Position For center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the drivetrain engine transmission clutch an
363. rgo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Exhaust Gas WARNING Continued WARNING e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into follow these safety tips the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed e Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in system confined areas any longer than needed to move Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust your vehicle in or out of the area system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is open make sure that all windows are closed and damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com the climate control BLOWER switch is set at hig
364. rive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing However if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE select TOW mode or use the Paddle Shift switches to manually select a lower gear NOTE Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking TOW Mode To reduce the potential for automatic transmission over heating select TOW mode when driving in hilly areas or select a lower gear using the Paddle Shift switches on more severe grades 436 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Paddle Shift Mode When using the Paddle Shift switches select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts For example choose 5 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 4 or 3 if needed to maintain the desired speed To prevent excess heat generation avoid continuous driving at high RPM Reduce vehicle speed as neces sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain an
365. river door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter e Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Memory To FOB If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be availa
366. rror select but gt _ Mirror Selection tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press the mirror select button for the mirror that 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Some vehicles may not be equipped with rear window defroster in this case the heated mirrors will still function as intended Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle for further information Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With Memory Seat Only If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground rearward of the front doors Outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE Outside mirrors w
367. rs the EVIC will display the PARKSENSE UN AVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN SORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper and or front fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE QUIRED message appears in the EVIC see an autho rized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSenseQ off the instrument
368. rs and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you ar
369. rsonal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Modes Of Operation With Uconnect System If Equipped Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Program mable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio is muted Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on will also be muted NOTE Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio
370. ry Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Pro grammable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver s door Hood Release 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to 2 Reach under the hood move safety latch to the left and lift the hood 0313001488 Safety Latch Location close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head light switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and fog lights if equipped 031409529 Headlig
371. s 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap 072607742 Wav 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC the low washer fluid level will be indicated When the sensor detects a low fluid level the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the WASHER FLUID LOW message will be displayed The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or worki
372. s When in Four Wheel Drive Low e When you apply the brakes When the parking brake is set e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range e When the brakes are overheated When the driver door is open e When the driver seat belt is unbuckled a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 To Activate To turn the system OFF push and release the Adaptive Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control ACC ON OFF button again At this ON OFF button The ACC menu in the EVIC displays time the system will turn off and the EVIC will display ACC Ready Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Off Adaptive Cruise C i ACC Ready irt Off 0323001263 0323001278 Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Adaptive Cruise Control Off 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the SET button or the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 32 km h the Set Speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph 32
373. s and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed NOTE The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram 055703771 Tire Rotation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS NOTE For vehicles equipped with run flat tires When the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of 14 psi 96 kPa or lower always check tire pressure and replace the tire at the first opportunity At inflation pressure of or below 14 psi 96 kPa the tire is in the run flat mode of operation In this condition it is recommended a vehicle maximum speed of 50 mph 80 km h for a maximum distance of 50 miles 80 km Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend using the run flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or towing a trailer The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases
374. s save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the
375. screen on Press the Back hard key to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect Access system Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Access dis play Customer Programmable Features Uconnect amp Access 8 4 Settings Press the Apps soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect Access system allows you to access program mable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and Siri usXM Setup NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected Once the setting is complete either press the Back Arrow soft key or the Back hard key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto
376. see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Electric Power Steering Malfunction If Equipped el o Liftgate Ajar This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate may be ajar p 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC Green Telltales e Electronic Speed Control SET This telltale will illuminate green when the elec tronic speed control is SET
377. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure alow Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 14WK742 126 AB Second Edition Printed in U S A
378. sity come on whenever the engine is running and the transmission is not in the PARK position The lights will remain on until the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake is engaged The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will not turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch Adaptive Bi Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights If Equipped This system automatically swivels the headlight beam pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in the direction the vehicle is steering NOTE Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on the headlights will initialize by performing a brief sequence of rotations The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when the vehicle is moving forward The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlig
379. sor and inhibit ACC FCW operation Clean Front Windshield Warning The ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per formance This most often occurs at times of poor visibil ity such as in snow or heavy rain and fog The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 obstructions such as mud dirt or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass In these cases the EVIC will display ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield and the system will have degraded perfor mance The ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflec tive tiles or ice and snow The ACC FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rear view mirror They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present the system will return to full function ality NOTE If the ACC FCW Limited Function
380. spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing nut 444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jacking 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block WARNING wT the left rear wheel 060505162 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery surfaces Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to moving traffic pull far enough off NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack When the vehicle is being jacked or changing the wheel 7 For vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting And Op erating for further information on disabling auto 3 Set the parking brake matic leveling 4 Place the shift lever into PARK 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 5 Turn the ignition OFF a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 445 Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake
381. speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if ESC system is in the Partial Off mode Refer to Elec tronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information A STARTING AND OPERATING 377 Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes
382. ss the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Messages e e e e e e Front Seatbelts Unbuckled Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled Service Airbag System Traction Control Off Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Antilock Brake System e Service Electronic Throttle Control Service Power Steering Cruise Off Cruise Ready Cruise Set To XXX MPH Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire s Inflate Tire to XX Service Tire Pressure System Parking Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Service Electronic Braking System Engine Temperature Hot es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 Battery Voltage Low e Remote Start Aborted Door Open e Service Electronic Throttle Control Remote Start Aborted Hood Open e Lights On Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open Right Turn Signal Light Out Remote Start Aborted Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset e Left Turn Signal Light Out Turn Signal On Vehicle Not in Park Service Airbag System e o Service Airbag Warning Light Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled Passenger Seatbelt
383. ssure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference 416 STARTING AND OPERATING HN e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses MRXC4W4MA4 2546A CAWAMAA United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 6 4L Engine The 6 4L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provid
384. stem Cancel Driver Override e System Off ACC Proximity Warning a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 e ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity Display Warnings And Maintenance Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor and the system will deactivate The ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path mm this warning may temporarily occur NOTE If the ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional informa tion refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are n
385. street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 545 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com
386. stribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 OAT Organic Additive Technology coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the 342
387. switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position 352 STARTING AND OPERATING HN ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC will display ACC Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second t
388. t Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen ger seat Yes Contact between the front passen ger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed Yes center position only Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Yes In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbin
389. t 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API categories of SM or SM CF The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic SAE 0W 40 engine oil Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher aaa MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission We recommend you ONLY use Mopar ZF 8 amp 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid Shell L12108 Transmission Fluid Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Front Axle We recommend you use 75W 85 Fuch 5010D Rear Axle We recommend you use 75W 85 Castrol SAF Carbon Mod Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPARG DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Aut
390. t O 2012 Chrysler Group LLC e SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION Loser herir bera ptr lr nervio EU 3 HEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE sse eee 1 Il UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE see 113 3o UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL lene 281 A STARTING AND OPERATING aua Douda tco parker were Dau v pa ta a oid 345 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 ctp s e e Ec REDE EY TTE EPOR RUE BRI UE Rd e A 439 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE siste 465 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 4 6 id tud opes PR ERN S VOCE e UE man de o dd 521 E IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE sosconosteovarrisirerosan cares crees 537 9 INDEX M M 547 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION 000 4 B WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 8 M ROLLOVER WARNING eese 5 M VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 8 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 6 B VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 9 4 INTRODUCTION IN INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle It can go places and perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not intended It handles and maneuvers differentl
391. t can be switched to bat tery powered all the time by switching the power outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin 2 F90 F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse Panel 3 F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the gene
392. t malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N ie E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE zuerst y ale a wand 539 Impaired TDD TTY 000 541 Prepare For The Appointment 539 Service Contract essas resesi onp nera 541 Prepare A List sse cope RR 539 M WARRANTY INFORMATION 542 Be Reasonable With Requests 539 B MOPARO PARTS enne 543 B IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 539 M REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 543 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 540 In The 50 United States And Washington D C 6 0 02 ee 543 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 540 In Mexico contact osea lef fy m 541 A ll PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 538 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades cae ti are oea a aoa ae 545 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 545 Tread wet xam bits ted dd 545 Temperature Grades o ooooo ooo ooo 546 a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 539 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have
393. t the first N J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary sign of irregular wear E 1 Inspect the CV joints 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Q Inspect exhaust system change if using your vehicle for po S 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all lice taxi fleet sustained high speed C parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary driving off road or frequent trailer H towing E B U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8 Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center M A l N T E N A N e E S C H E D U L E S 8 530 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear 11 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road condi tions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 11 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper loose ness or end play replace if necessary 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 11 Change the engine oil and engine o
394. te only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not let children play with power windows Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop Auto Down Window Switches Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Driver And Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To stop the window fro
395. tely Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 14 Fuel GaugelFuel Door Reminder The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 15 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light i Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the A UNDERSTA
396. tened after you shorten the buckle disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around one half turn and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight try a different seating position Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage a 1 Look behind the seating position where you El AY plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position see the charts above move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the top tether strap anchorages SALLALI I I I i Top Tether Strap Anchorage Located on Seatback C 3 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105 between the two posts If not possible lower the head
397. tery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453 WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located under the passen ger s front seat There are remote locations located under the hood to assist in jump starting 060833324 mm 1 Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap 2 Remote Negative Post Remote Battery Posts 454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery NOTE Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn o
398. tesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens To turn the lights off press the lens a second time 031464435 Courtesy Lights Sunglasses Bin Door Atthe front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close 033333448 Sunglasses Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button 034033576 HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II 034000355 HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active Before You Begin Programming HomeLink amp Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a ne
399. than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced STARTING AND OPERATING 405 tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to replacement tires in this section for further informa tion Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure ON 055007576 Distance driven 1 Worn Tire Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or 2 New Tire higher and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread tenance schedule is highly recommended grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the 406 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Repl
400. the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button to activate the electronic speed control CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is on To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET or SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH KM will appear indicating what speed was set An indicator CRUISE will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
401. the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds To recall the memory settings for driver one using the memory switch press MEMORY button number 1 on the memory switch To recall the memory settings for driver one using the RKE transmitter press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by following steps 1 4 above and press ing the UNLOCK button instead of LOCK on the RKE e To recall the memory setting for driver two using the transmitter in Step 4 memory switch press MEMORY button number 2 on the memory switch Driver Two Memory Position Recall Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver two using the RKE transmitter press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the steering column stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
402. the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri odically A child s squirming or slouching can move the or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or behind their back Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Use any attachment method shown with an X Below LATCH Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Child Child LP UR Lower Anchors Seat Belt Top Restraint Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only Top Tether Tether Anchor Only Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the chi
403. the rear doors press the Window Lockout button To enable the window controls press the Window Lockout button again Window Lockout Button 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To Unlock Enter The Liftgate The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate handle With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the electronic liftgate handle to open with one fluid motion To Lock The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the passive entry lock button located to the right of electronic liftgate handle NOTE The liftgate passive entry lock button will only lock the liftgate the liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate handle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING Driving with the liftgate open c
404. the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealer you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 540 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the v
405. the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to 410 STARTING AND OPERATING HN the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the up dated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example
406. the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h within Braking Distance 10 seconds 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN The feature will ready when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will appear when conditions are met for the event to begin The screen will revert back to Please come to a complete stop Not Ready if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph 100 km h in less then 10 seconds The time will continue to display until the OK button is pressed or the vehicles is brought to a stop Braking Distance When selected this screen displays the vehicle s braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was depressed This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature The word READY will display when conditions are met for the event to begin The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com plete stop The distance and speed measurements will continue to display until the conditions are met for another event to be recorded e Pressing the OK button will clear the current run and prepare the cluster to record a new run 1 8 Mile 1 4 Mile When selected this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1 8 mile
407. time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment O Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring
408. ting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS M MIRRORS Sees erpxExPXesa dd ebd 121 Heated Mirrors If Equi
409. to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove fuse J13 in the Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM labeled Main Ignition Off Draw IOD Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Glove Box Lamp 194 L002825W5W Grab Handle Lamp a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 Bulb Number Bulb Number Premium Park Turn Signal Lamp LED Service at Authorized Dealer Daytime Running Lamp DRL 3157K Premium Daytime Running Lamp DRL LED Service at Authorized Dealer Front Fog Lamps PSX24W Front Side Marker WSW Overhead Console VT4976 Reading Lamps Rear Cargo Lamp 214 2 Visor Vanity Lamp V26377 Underpanel Courtesy 906 Lamps Instrument Cluster 103 General Illumination Telltale Hazard Lamp 74 Premium Front Side Marker LED Service at Authorized Dealer Exterior Bulbs Front Park Turn Lamp T20 Bulb Number Headlamps Low Beam H11 Premium Headlamps Low High Beam D3S Serviced at Authorized Dealer
410. top the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light tel ee Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator 5 384 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignitio
411. touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE This device must accept any interference received REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED including interference that may cause undesired op eration This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved 2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve by the party responsible for compliance could void the niently from outside the vehicle while still user s authority to operate the equipment maintaining security The system has a range of If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal Appeosumately SDUGEUULBU distance check for these two conditions NOTE 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic life of the battery is a minimum of three years transmission to be equipped with Remote Start 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station e Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB mitt
412. transmission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis sion damage CAUTION e If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your au thorized dealer immediately Severe transmission damage may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Routine fluid and filter changes are not required How ever change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne c
413. ts When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 16 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair tech
414. tton DO NOT erase the channels 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button If y
415. uch as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty 418 STARTING AND OPERATING HN E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on poor engine performance poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer change the engine oil and oil filter disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controll
416. uffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches can be programmed to remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Opening either front door will cancel this fea ture Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories The power outlets are labeled with either a key o
417. ul for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Setting 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions Low Ambient Temperature When t
418. ult in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also is stamped into the right front body behind the right front seat Move the right front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN This number also appears on the Automobile Infor mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment VIN Location 010809610 INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS Ia m Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death pm Right Front Body VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 2 ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 14 To Arm The SysteM o ooooooomooo ooo 20 Keyless Ignition Node KIN
419. unexpectedly p S LL X J ES 5 032400170 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Turns And Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons with no target vehicle detected Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed This is a part of normal ACC system functionality NOTE On tight turns ACC performance may be limited 032400171 Using ACC On Hills When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor mance may be limited 032400172 Lane Changing ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 system to take action ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There may not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 032400173 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
420. ur wheel drive operation can be used on and off road Balances traction with seamless steering feel to provide im proved handling and acceleration over two wheel drive vehicles The active suspension system will be in Touring Mode A STARTING AND OPERATING 367 Track Track road calibration for use on high traction surfaces Driveline is maximized for traction Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces The electronic brake controls are set to Partial OFF to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin The transmission will be in SPORT mode and provide a more aggressive shifting pattern Refer to Paddle Shift Mode in Starting And Operating for further informa tion The customer has the option of going to FULL OFF with no interaction from the ESC System The active suspension system will be in Full Firm mode This feature will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle Tow Use this mode for towing Vehicle suspension will go to Firm mode Trailer sway control is enabled in the ESC system The terrain switch will remain in this position through an ignition cycle until the cus tomer cycles into another position 368 STARTING AND OPERATING INN Active Damping System Launch Mode If Equipped This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight damping system This system reduces body rolland pitch line racing in many driving situations
421. urability of your vehicle vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo maintenance schedule there are other components which nents as the chemicals can damage your engine may require servicing or replacement in the future transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could fluid for the flushing procedure result in more costly repairs damage to other Engine Oil Checking Oil Level components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must repair center be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to Continued 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding one quart of oil when the readin
422. ure This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the
423. ure allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into posi tion Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second Row ALR ALR ALR N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped
424. ure bar towards the blue arrow soft key for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 14 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the hard key button for warmer temperature settings or on the touch screen press and slide the soft key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft key for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings Also make sure to select only Panel Bi Level or Floor modes NOTE If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed f your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the con
425. ust be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Continued a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 WARNING Continued Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph 32 km h 032173457 The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the Electronic Speed Control Buttons right side of the steering wheel 1 ON OFF 4 SET DECEL 2 SET ACCEL 5 CANCEL 3 RESUME 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE In order to ensure proper operation
426. utes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Compass Settings If Equipped After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calib
427. ve the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON Run position Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrap ment may result in serious injury or death Inacollision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen 034134074 gers are also properly secured Power Sunroof Switch Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one h
428. ve shifting Refer to Selec Trac amp in Starting And Operating for further information PADDLE SHIFT MODE Paddle Shift mode is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle Paddle Shift allows you to maxi mize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situa tions Operation When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode it will operate automatically shifting between the eight available gears To engage Paddle Shift mode simply tap one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles while in DRIVE or SPORT mode Tapping to enter Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear while using to enter Paddle Shift mode will retain the current gear When Paddle Shift mode is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In Paddle Shift mode the transmission will shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would A STARTING AND OPERATING 365 result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as described below e Normally in Paddle Shift mode the transmission w
429. vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 391 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 055001823 B Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information Placard 392 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF qu anos AE SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR TIRE FRONT SPARE
430. verter as referenced the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced above can reach higher temperatures than d normal if the light stays on through several of your typical Operating conditions This can cause a fire if you driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive drive slowly or park over flammable substances such normally and will not require towing as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or CAUTION others Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator 11 Electronic Park Brake Failure Indicator If Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine Equipped control system It also could affect fuel economy and af This light indicates the Electronic Parking drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic Q Brake system requires service o converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN 12 Engine Temperature Indicator This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over
431. very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then 378 STARTING AND OPERATING HN applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent w
432. view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver 030405522 RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph 5 km h to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph 32 km h such as in parking lot situations 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM NOTE In a parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up Fail ure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Modes Of Operation With EVIC Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Pe
433. vious menu Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster If Equipped When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing th
434. w battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance mmmm UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the
435. w of the sensor The vehicle ahead slows to a complete stop 0 mph 0 km h for more than 2 seconds and the system automatically disengages itself The distance setting is changed The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity 0323001258 Brake Alert When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Overtake Aid When driving with ACC engaged and following a target vehicle the system will provide an additional accelera tion to assist in passing vehicles in front This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal In locations with left hand drive traffic Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left hand side of the Target vehicles When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic the ACC s
436. ween the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph 24 km h the warning light will not illuminate Rear Monitoring UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Overtaking Approaching Overtaking Passing 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in berms etc However occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Opposing Traffic Stationary Objects a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicles mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear
437. when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 NOTE The Easy Ent
438. windows other controls or move Tf the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door the vehicle will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door 021809604 R 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door the vehicle and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock If a rear door is locked it cannot be opened from inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door The door may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Child Protection Door Lock Location Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 021806189 Y Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged locked THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged manually raise the do
439. with access to an unlocked vehicle Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 WARNING Continued CAUTION e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever e Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or SENTRY KEY in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unau Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The operate power windows other controls or move System does not need to be armed or activated Operation the vehicle is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked e Do not leave children or animals inside parked or unlocked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended The system uses a Key Fob with a factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate 1
440. y be illuminated A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions and indicate what actions may be necessary In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps NOTE In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re engage after en gine shutdown perform this procedure only in a desired location preferably at your authorized dealer 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK if possible Turn the engine OFF 3 4 Wait approximately 30 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required 364 STARTING AND OPERATING HN When To Use TOW Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs select TOW mode using the rotary switch on the center console Selecting TOW mode will improve per formance and reduce the potential for transmission over heating or failure due to excessi
441. y from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to a INTRODUCTION 5 read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure sa
442. ying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information EE STARTING AND OPERATING 429 Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions The following chart provides the industry standard for Class Max Trailer Hitch In the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can dustry Standards tow and should be used to assist you
443. ystem will automatically detect traffic direction In this condition Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the right side of the Target vehicle This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right turn signal In this condition the ACC system will no longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location with left hand drive traffic 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the center of the instrument cluster The information it displays depends on ACC system status Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC ON OFF button located on the steering wheel until one of the following displays in the EVIC Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adap tive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Press the SET or the SET button located on the steering wheel and the following will display in the EVIC ACC SET When ACC is set the set speed will continue to display in the lower right hand corner of the cluster The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following Distance Setting Change e Sy
444. zing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 22 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park 2007 lights or headlights are turned on ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the buttons mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following Digital Speedometer e Vehicle Info Fuel Economy Info nm e Trip A e Trip B TOS du Radio Info Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Location e Stored Messages e Screen Setup e SRT e 4WD Setup e Driver Assistance 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The system allows the driver to select information by e UP Arrow Button prese ng te tollowing Potone Mounted Gn thie steering A Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll wheel upward through the main menu and sub menus Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Audio Stored Messages Screen Set Up e DOWN Arrow Button Press and release the DOWN arrow button to V scroll downward through the main menu and sub menus Fuel Economy lrip A Trip B Audio Stored Messages S

2014 Jeep Grand Cherokee SRT Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents